+ All Categories
Home > Documents > Quantum Information Theory...

Quantum Information Theory...

Date post: 22-Aug-2020
Category:
Upload: others
View: 0 times
Download: 0 times
Share this document with a friend
455
Quantum Information Theory Tutorial Mark M. Wilde Hearne Institute for Theoretical Physics, Department of Physics and Astronomy, Center for Computation and Technology, Louisiana State University, Baton Rouge, Louisiana, USA [email protected] Reference: Quantum Information Theory published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016, ISIT 2016, Barcelona, Spain Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 1 / 113
Transcript
Page 1: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum Information Theory Tutorial

Mark M. Wilde

Hearne Institute for Theoretical Physics,Department of Physics and Astronomy,

Center for Computation and Technology,Louisiana State University,

Baton Rouge, Louisiana, USA

[email protected]

Reference: Quantum Information Theorypublished by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming)

July 10, 2016, ISIT 2016, Barcelona, Spain

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 1 / 113

Page 2: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Main questions

What are the ultimate limitations on communication imposed byphysical laws?

What are methods for achieving these limits?

To address these questions, we need to consider quantum mechanics,and so we are naturally led to an intersection of information theoryand quantum mechanics called quantum information theory

What is different about quantum and “classical” information theory?

What tasks can we achieve with quantum mechanics that we cannotwithout it? (long list: Bell inequalities, super-dense coding,teleportation, data locking, data hiding, quantum cryptography, etc.)

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 2 / 113

Page 3: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Main questions

What are the ultimate limitations on communication imposed byphysical laws?

What are methods for achieving these limits?

To address these questions, we need to consider quantum mechanics,and so we are naturally led to an intersection of information theoryand quantum mechanics called quantum information theory

What is different about quantum and “classical” information theory?

What tasks can we achieve with quantum mechanics that we cannotwithout it? (long list: Bell inequalities, super-dense coding,teleportation, data locking, data hiding, quantum cryptography, etc.)

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 2 / 113

Page 4: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Main questions

What are the ultimate limitations on communication imposed byphysical laws?

What are methods for achieving these limits?

To address these questions, we need to consider quantum mechanics,and so we are naturally led to an intersection of information theoryand quantum mechanics called quantum information theory

What is different about quantum and “classical” information theory?

What tasks can we achieve with quantum mechanics that we cannotwithout it? (long list: Bell inequalities, super-dense coding,teleportation, data locking, data hiding, quantum cryptography, etc.)

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 2 / 113

Page 5: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Main questions

What are the ultimate limitations on communication imposed byphysical laws?

What are methods for achieving these limits?

To address these questions, we need to consider quantum mechanics,and so we are naturally led to an intersection of information theoryand quantum mechanics called quantum information theory

What is different about quantum and “classical” information theory?

What tasks can we achieve with quantum mechanics that we cannotwithout it? (long list: Bell inequalities, super-dense coding,teleportation, data locking, data hiding, quantum cryptography, etc.)

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 2 / 113

Page 6: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Main questions

What are the ultimate limitations on communication imposed byphysical laws?

What are methods for achieving these limits?

To address these questions, we need to consider quantum mechanics,and so we are naturally led to an intersection of information theoryand quantum mechanics called quantum information theory

What is different about quantum and “classical” information theory?

What tasks can we achieve with quantum mechanics that we cannotwithout it? (long list: Bell inequalities, super-dense coding,teleportation, data locking, data hiding, quantum cryptography, etc.)

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 2 / 113

Page 7: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Main questions

What are the ultimate limitations on communication imposed byphysical laws?

What are methods for achieving these limits?

To address these questions, we need to consider quantum mechanics,and so we are naturally led to an intersection of information theoryand quantum mechanics called quantum information theory

What is different about quantum and “classical” information theory?

What tasks can we achieve with quantum mechanics that we cannotwithout it? (long list: Bell inequalities, super-dense coding,teleportation, data locking, data hiding, quantum cryptography, etc.)

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 2 / 113

Page 8: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Prehistory of quantum information theory

1927 Heisenberg uncertainty principle

1935 Einstein–Podolsky–Rosen paper questioning compatibility ofuncertainty principle and phenomenon of quantum entanglement /1964 Bell’s theorem as an answer / 2009 Berta et al. entropicuncertainty relation as another answer

1932 von Neumann quantum entropy / 1962 Umegaki quantumrelative entropy / 1973 Lieb–Ruskai strong subadditivity of quantumentropy / 1975 Lindblad data-processing for quantum relative entropy

1970s theory of quantum measurements and similarity measures forquantum states — Helstrom, Holevo (Shannon Award 2016), Ozawa,Bures, Uhlmann, etc.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 3 / 113

Page 9: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Prehistory of quantum information theory

1927 Heisenberg uncertainty principle

1935 Einstein–Podolsky–Rosen paper questioning compatibility ofuncertainty principle and phenomenon of quantum entanglement /1964 Bell’s theorem as an answer / 2009 Berta et al. entropicuncertainty relation as another answer

1932 von Neumann quantum entropy / 1962 Umegaki quantumrelative entropy / 1973 Lieb–Ruskai strong subadditivity of quantumentropy / 1975 Lindblad data-processing for quantum relative entropy

1970s theory of quantum measurements and similarity measures forquantum states — Helstrom, Holevo (Shannon Award 2016), Ozawa,Bures, Uhlmann, etc.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 3 / 113

Page 10: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Prehistory of quantum information theory

1927 Heisenberg uncertainty principle

1935 Einstein–Podolsky–Rosen paper questioning compatibility ofuncertainty principle and phenomenon of quantum entanglement /1964 Bell’s theorem as an answer / 2009 Berta et al. entropicuncertainty relation as another answer

1932 von Neumann quantum entropy / 1962 Umegaki quantumrelative entropy / 1973 Lieb–Ruskai strong subadditivity of quantumentropy / 1975 Lindblad data-processing for quantum relative entropy

1970s theory of quantum measurements and similarity measures forquantum states — Helstrom, Holevo (Shannon Award 2016), Ozawa,Bures, Uhlmann, etc.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 3 / 113

Page 11: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Prehistory of quantum information theory

1927 Heisenberg uncertainty principle

1935 Einstein–Podolsky–Rosen paper questioning compatibility ofuncertainty principle and phenomenon of quantum entanglement /1964 Bell’s theorem as an answer / 2009 Berta et al. entropicuncertainty relation as another answer

1932 von Neumann quantum entropy / 1962 Umegaki quantumrelative entropy / 1973 Lieb–Ruskai strong subadditivity of quantumentropy / 1975 Lindblad data-processing for quantum relative entropy

1970s theory of quantum measurements and similarity measures forquantum states — Helstrom, Holevo (Shannon Award 2016), Ozawa,Bures, Uhlmann, etc.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 3 / 113

Page 12: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Prehistory of quantum information theory

1927 Heisenberg uncertainty principle

1935 Einstein–Podolsky–Rosen paper questioning compatibility ofuncertainty principle and phenomenon of quantum entanglement /1964 Bell’s theorem as an answer / 2009 Berta et al. entropicuncertainty relation as another answer

1932 von Neumann quantum entropy / 1962 Umegaki quantumrelative entropy / 1973 Lieb–Ruskai strong subadditivity of quantumentropy / 1975 Lindblad data-processing for quantum relative entropy

1970s theory of quantum measurements and similarity measures forquantum states — Helstrom, Holevo (Shannon Award 2016), Ozawa,Bures, Uhlmann, etc.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 3 / 113

Page 13: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Information theory

1948 — Shannon set the foundations of information theory, definingnotions like data compression and channel capacity and givinganswers in terms of entropy and mutual information, resp.

Shannon considered only classical physics (without quantum effects)

His work (and that of others) ultimately led to questions like:

“How do quantum effects enhance communication capacity?”

“How do quantum effects enhance communication security?”

“What are some quantum communication tasks that do not have acounterpart in the classical world?”

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 4 / 113

Page 14: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Information theory

1948 — Shannon set the foundations of information theory, definingnotions like data compression and channel capacity and givinganswers in terms of entropy and mutual information, resp.

Shannon considered only classical physics (without quantum effects)

His work (and that of others) ultimately led to questions like:

“How do quantum effects enhance communication capacity?”

“How do quantum effects enhance communication security?”

“What are some quantum communication tasks that do not have acounterpart in the classical world?”

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 4 / 113

Page 15: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Information theory

1948 — Shannon set the foundations of information theory, definingnotions like data compression and channel capacity and givinganswers in terms of entropy and mutual information, resp.

Shannon considered only classical physics (without quantum effects)

His work (and that of others) ultimately led to questions like:

“How do quantum effects enhance communication capacity?”

“How do quantum effects enhance communication security?”

“What are some quantum communication tasks that do not have acounterpart in the classical world?”

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 4 / 113

Page 16: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Information theory

1948 — Shannon set the foundations of information theory, definingnotions like data compression and channel capacity and givinganswers in terms of entropy and mutual information, resp.

Shannon considered only classical physics (without quantum effects)

His work (and that of others) ultimately led to questions like:

“How do quantum effects enhance communication capacity?”

“How do quantum effects enhance communication security?”

“What are some quantum communication tasks that do not have acounterpart in the classical world?”

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 4 / 113

Page 17: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Information theory

1948 — Shannon set the foundations of information theory, definingnotions like data compression and channel capacity and givinganswers in terms of entropy and mutual information, resp.

Shannon considered only classical physics (without quantum effects)

His work (and that of others) ultimately led to questions like:

“How do quantum effects enhance communication capacity?”

“How do quantum effects enhance communication security?”

“What are some quantum communication tasks that do not have acounterpart in the classical world?”

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 4 / 113

Page 18: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Information theory

1948 — Shannon set the foundations of information theory, definingnotions like data compression and channel capacity and givinganswers in terms of entropy and mutual information, resp.

Shannon considered only classical physics (without quantum effects)

His work (and that of others) ultimately led to questions like:

“How do quantum effects enhance communication capacity?”

“How do quantum effects enhance communication security?”

“What are some quantum communication tasks that do not have acounterpart in the classical world?”

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 4 / 113

Page 19: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Information theory

1948 — Shannon set the foundations of information theory, definingnotions like data compression and channel capacity and givinganswers in terms of entropy and mutual information, resp.

Shannon considered only classical physics (without quantum effects)

His work (and that of others) ultimately led to questions like:

“How do quantum effects enhance communication capacity?”

“How do quantum effects enhance communication security?”

“What are some quantum communication tasks that do not have acounterpart in the classical world?”

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 4 / 113

Page 20: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tutorial overview

Quantum states and channels

Fundamental protocols: Bell / CHSH game, entanglementdistribution, super-dense coding, quantum teleportation

Distance measures for quantum states

Information measures

Quantum data compression

Communication over quantum channels

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 5 / 113

Page 21: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tutorial overview

Quantum states and channels

Fundamental protocols: Bell / CHSH game, entanglementdistribution, super-dense coding, quantum teleportation

Distance measures for quantum states

Information measures

Quantum data compression

Communication over quantum channels

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 5 / 113

Page 22: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tutorial overview

Quantum states and channels

Fundamental protocols: Bell / CHSH game, entanglementdistribution, super-dense coding, quantum teleportation

Distance measures for quantum states

Information measures

Quantum data compression

Communication over quantum channels

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 5 / 113

Page 23: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tutorial overview

Quantum states and channels

Fundamental protocols: Bell / CHSH game, entanglementdistribution, super-dense coding, quantum teleportation

Distance measures for quantum states

Information measures

Quantum data compression

Communication over quantum channels

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 5 / 113

Page 24: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tutorial overview

Quantum states and channels

Fundamental protocols: Bell / CHSH game, entanglementdistribution, super-dense coding, quantum teleportation

Distance measures for quantum states

Information measures

Quantum data compression

Communication over quantum channels

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 5 / 113

Page 25: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tutorial overview

Quantum states and channels

Fundamental protocols: Bell / CHSH game, entanglementdistribution, super-dense coding, quantum teleportation

Distance measures for quantum states

Information measures

Quantum data compression

Communication over quantum channels

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 5 / 113

Page 26: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tutorial overview

Quantum states and channels

Fundamental protocols: Bell / CHSH game, entanglementdistribution, super-dense coding, quantum teleportation

Distance measures for quantum states

Information measures

Quantum data compression

Communication over quantum channels

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 5 / 113

Page 27: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Review of quantum formalism

Let’s begin by reviewing some basics of quantum information

All we need to start understanding quantum information is how torepresent states and evolutions of quantum systems.

We do this by using density matrices and quantum channels.

These ideas extend how we represent states of a classical system withprobability distributions and evolutions of these classical systems withclassical channels (conditional probability distributions).

We’ll find that the set of quantum states contains all classical statesand is far richer, which is suggestive of why we can do things that arenot possible in classical information theory.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 6 / 113

Page 28: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Review of quantum formalism

Let’s begin by reviewing some basics of quantum information

All we need to start understanding quantum information is how torepresent states and evolutions of quantum systems.

We do this by using density matrices and quantum channels.

These ideas extend how we represent states of a classical system withprobability distributions and evolutions of these classical systems withclassical channels (conditional probability distributions).

We’ll find that the set of quantum states contains all classical statesand is far richer, which is suggestive of why we can do things that arenot possible in classical information theory.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 6 / 113

Page 29: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Review of quantum formalism

Let’s begin by reviewing some basics of quantum information

All we need to start understanding quantum information is how torepresent states and evolutions of quantum systems.

We do this by using density matrices and quantum channels.

These ideas extend how we represent states of a classical system withprobability distributions and evolutions of these classical systems withclassical channels (conditional probability distributions).

We’ll find that the set of quantum states contains all classical statesand is far richer, which is suggestive of why we can do things that arenot possible in classical information theory.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 6 / 113

Page 30: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Review of quantum formalism

Let’s begin by reviewing some basics of quantum information

All we need to start understanding quantum information is how torepresent states and evolutions of quantum systems.

We do this by using density matrices and quantum channels.

These ideas extend how we represent states of a classical system withprobability distributions and evolutions of these classical systems withclassical channels (conditional probability distributions).

We’ll find that the set of quantum states contains all classical statesand is far richer, which is suggestive of why we can do things that arenot possible in classical information theory.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 6 / 113

Page 31: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Review of quantum formalism

Let’s begin by reviewing some basics of quantum information

All we need to start understanding quantum information is how torepresent states and evolutions of quantum systems.

We do this by using density matrices and quantum channels.

These ideas extend how we represent states of a classical system withprobability distributions and evolutions of these classical systems withclassical channels (conditional probability distributions).

We’ll find that the set of quantum states contains all classical statesand is far richer, which is suggestive of why we can do things that arenot possible in classical information theory.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 6 / 113

Page 32: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Review of quantum formalism

Let’s begin by reviewing some basics of quantum information

All we need to start understanding quantum information is how torepresent states and evolutions of quantum systems.

We do this by using density matrices and quantum channels.

These ideas extend how we represent states of a classical system withprobability distributions and evolutions of these classical systems withclassical channels (conditional probability distributions).

We’ll find that the set of quantum states contains all classical statesand is far richer, which is suggestive of why we can do things that arenot possible in classical information theory.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 6 / 113

Page 33: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum states

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 7 / 113

Page 34: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum states

The state of a quantum system is given by a square matrix called thedensity matrix, usually denoted by ρ, σ, τ , ω, etc.

It should be positive semi-definite and have trace equal to one. Thatis, all of its eigenvalues should be non-negative and sum up to one.We write these conditions symbolically as ρ ≥ 0 and Tr{ρ} = 1. Canabbreviate more simply as ρ ∈ D(H), to be read as “ρ is in the set ofdensity matrices.”

The dimension of the matrix indicates the number of distinguishablestates of the quantum system.

For example, a physical qubit is a quantum system with dimensiontwo. A classical bit, which has two distinguishable states, can beembedded into a qubit.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 8 / 113

Page 35: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum states

The state of a quantum system is given by a square matrix called thedensity matrix, usually denoted by ρ, σ, τ , ω, etc.

It should be positive semi-definite and have trace equal to one. Thatis, all of its eigenvalues should be non-negative and sum up to one.We write these conditions symbolically as ρ ≥ 0 and Tr{ρ} = 1. Canabbreviate more simply as ρ ∈ D(H), to be read as “ρ is in the set ofdensity matrices.”

The dimension of the matrix indicates the number of distinguishablestates of the quantum system.

For example, a physical qubit is a quantum system with dimensiontwo. A classical bit, which has two distinguishable states, can beembedded into a qubit.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 8 / 113

Page 36: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum states

The state of a quantum system is given by a square matrix called thedensity matrix, usually denoted by ρ, σ, τ , ω, etc.

It should be positive semi-definite and have trace equal to one. Thatis, all of its eigenvalues should be non-negative and sum up to one.We write these conditions symbolically as ρ ≥ 0 and Tr{ρ} = 1. Canabbreviate more simply as ρ ∈ D(H), to be read as “ρ is in the set ofdensity matrices.”

The dimension of the matrix indicates the number of distinguishablestates of the quantum system.

For example, a physical qubit is a quantum system with dimensiontwo. A classical bit, which has two distinguishable states, can beembedded into a qubit.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 8 / 113

Page 37: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum states

The state of a quantum system is given by a square matrix called thedensity matrix, usually denoted by ρ, σ, τ , ω, etc.

It should be positive semi-definite and have trace equal to one. Thatis, all of its eigenvalues should be non-negative and sum up to one.We write these conditions symbolically as ρ ≥ 0 and Tr{ρ} = 1. Canabbreviate more simply as ρ ∈ D(H), to be read as “ρ is in the set ofdensity matrices.”

The dimension of the matrix indicates the number of distinguishablestates of the quantum system.

For example, a physical qubit is a quantum system with dimensiontwo. A classical bit, which has two distinguishable states, can beembedded into a qubit.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 8 / 113

Page 38: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum states

The state of a quantum system is given by a square matrix called thedensity matrix, usually denoted by ρ, σ, τ , ω, etc.

It should be positive semi-definite and have trace equal to one. Thatis, all of its eigenvalues should be non-negative and sum up to one.We write these conditions symbolically as ρ ≥ 0 and Tr{ρ} = 1. Canabbreviate more simply as ρ ∈ D(H), to be read as “ρ is in the set ofdensity matrices.”

The dimension of the matrix indicates the number of distinguishablestates of the quantum system.

For example, a physical qubit is a quantum system with dimensiontwo. A classical bit, which has two distinguishable states, can beembedded into a qubit.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 8 / 113

Page 39: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Interpretation of density matrix

The density matrix, in addition to a description of an experimentalprocedure, is all that one requires to predict the (probabilistic)outcomes of a given experiment performed on a quantum system.

It is a generalization of (and subsumes) a probability distribution,which describes the state of a classical system. All probabilitydistributions can be embedded into a quantum state by placing theentries along the diagonal of the density matrix.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 9 / 113

Page 40: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Interpretation of density matrix

The density matrix, in addition to a description of an experimentalprocedure, is all that one requires to predict the (probabilistic)outcomes of a given experiment performed on a quantum system.

It is a generalization of (and subsumes) a probability distribution,which describes the state of a classical system. All probabilitydistributions can be embedded into a quantum state by placing theentries along the diagonal of the density matrix.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 9 / 113

Page 41: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Interpretation of density matrix

The density matrix, in addition to a description of an experimentalprocedure, is all that one requires to predict the (probabilistic)outcomes of a given experiment performed on a quantum system.

It is a generalization of (and subsumes) a probability distribution,which describes the state of a classical system. All probabilitydistributions can be embedded into a quantum state by placing theentries along the diagonal of the density matrix.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 9 / 113

Page 42: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Let’s talk about qubits...

Superconducting phase qubit fromhttp://web.physics.ucsb.edu/˜martinisgroup/photos.shtml,

taken by Erik Lucero

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 10 / 113

Page 43: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Examples of quantum states

Let

|0〉 ≡[

10

], 〈0| ≡

[1 0

],

so that density matrix ρ0 ≡ |0〉〈0| =

[1 00 0

].

Similarly, let

|1〉 ≡[

01

], 〈1| ≡

[0 1

],

so that density matrix ρ1 ≡ |1〉〈1| =

[0 00 1

].

Then ρ0ρ1 = 0. The states ρ0 and ρ1 are orthogonal to each other,and, physically, this means that they are perfectly distinguishable.

What we have done here is to embed classical bits into quantum bits.We can think of ρ0 as ‘0’ and ρ1 as ‘1.’

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 11 / 113

Page 44: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Examples of quantum states

Let

|0〉 ≡[

10

], 〈0| ≡

[1 0

],

so that density matrix ρ0 ≡ |0〉〈0| =

[1 00 0

].

Similarly, let

|1〉 ≡[

01

], 〈1| ≡

[0 1

],

so that density matrix ρ1 ≡ |1〉〈1| =

[0 00 1

].

Then ρ0ρ1 = 0. The states ρ0 and ρ1 are orthogonal to each other,and, physically, this means that they are perfectly distinguishable.

What we have done here is to embed classical bits into quantum bits.We can think of ρ0 as ‘0’ and ρ1 as ‘1.’

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 11 / 113

Page 45: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Examples of quantum states

Let

|0〉 ≡[

10

], 〈0| ≡

[1 0

],

so that density matrix ρ0 ≡ |0〉〈0| =

[1 00 0

].

Similarly, let

|1〉 ≡[

01

], 〈1| ≡

[0 1

],

so that density matrix ρ1 ≡ |1〉〈1| =

[0 00 1

].

Then ρ0ρ1 = 0. The states ρ0 and ρ1 are orthogonal to each other,and, physically, this means that they are perfectly distinguishable.

What we have done here is to embed classical bits into quantum bits.We can think of ρ0 as ‘0’ and ρ1 as ‘1.’

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 11 / 113

Page 46: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Examples of quantum states

Let

|0〉 ≡[

10

], 〈0| ≡

[1 0

],

so that density matrix ρ0 ≡ |0〉〈0| =

[1 00 0

].

Similarly, let

|1〉 ≡[

01

], 〈1| ≡

[0 1

],

so that density matrix ρ1 ≡ |1〉〈1| =

[0 00 1

].

Then ρ0ρ1 = 0. The states ρ0 and ρ1 are orthogonal to each other,and, physically, this means that they are perfectly distinguishable.

What we have done here is to embed classical bits into quantum bits.We can think of ρ0 as ‘0’ and ρ1 as ‘1.’

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 11 / 113

Page 47: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Examples of quantum states

Let

|0〉 ≡[

10

], 〈0| ≡

[1 0

],

so that density matrix ρ0 ≡ |0〉〈0| =

[1 00 0

].

Similarly, let

|1〉 ≡[

01

], 〈1| ≡

[0 1

],

so that density matrix ρ1 ≡ |1〉〈1| =

[0 00 1

].

Then ρ0ρ1 = 0. The states ρ0 and ρ1 are orthogonal to each other,and, physically, this means that they are perfectly distinguishable.

What we have done here is to embed classical bits into quantum bits.We can think of ρ0 as ‘0’ and ρ1 as ‘1.’

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 11 / 113

Page 48: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Mixtures of quantum states

Any probabilistic mixture of two quantum states is also a quantumstate. That is, for σ0, σ1 ∈ D(H) and p ∈ [0, 1], we have

pσ0 + (1− p)σ1 ∈ D(H).

The set of density matrices is thus convex.

For our classical example, we find

pρ0 + (1− p)ρ1 = p|0〉〈0|+ (1− p)|1〉〈1|

=

[p 00 1− p

].

This is the statement that probabilistic classical bits can be embeddedinto quantum bits, and the probabilities appear along the diagonal ofthe matrix. Can we have other kinds of quantum states?

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 12 / 113

Page 49: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Mixtures of quantum states

Any probabilistic mixture of two quantum states is also a quantumstate. That is, for σ0, σ1 ∈ D(H) and p ∈ [0, 1], we have

pσ0 + (1− p)σ1 ∈ D(H).

The set of density matrices is thus convex.

For our classical example, we find

pρ0 + (1− p)ρ1 = p|0〉〈0|+ (1− p)|1〉〈1|

=

[p 00 1− p

].

This is the statement that probabilistic classical bits can be embeddedinto quantum bits, and the probabilities appear along the diagonal ofthe matrix. Can we have other kinds of quantum states?

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 12 / 113

Page 50: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Mixtures of quantum states

Any probabilistic mixture of two quantum states is also a quantumstate. That is, for σ0, σ1 ∈ D(H) and p ∈ [0, 1], we have

pσ0 + (1− p)σ1 ∈ D(H).

The set of density matrices is thus convex.

For our classical example, we find

pρ0 + (1− p)ρ1 = p|0〉〈0|+ (1− p)|1〉〈1|

=

[p 00 1− p

].

This is the statement that probabilistic classical bits can be embeddedinto quantum bits, and the probabilities appear along the diagonal ofthe matrix. Can we have other kinds of quantum states?

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 12 / 113

Page 51: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Mixtures of quantum states

Any probabilistic mixture of two quantum states is also a quantumstate. That is, for σ0, σ1 ∈ D(H) and p ∈ [0, 1], we have

pσ0 + (1− p)σ1 ∈ D(H).

The set of density matrices is thus convex.

For our classical example, we find

pρ0 + (1− p)ρ1 = p|0〉〈0|+ (1− p)|1〉〈1|

=

[p 00 1− p

].

This is the statement that probabilistic classical bits can be embeddedinto quantum bits, and the probabilities appear along the diagonal ofthe matrix. Can we have other kinds of quantum states?

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 12 / 113

Page 52: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Superpositions of quantum states

Construct the following unit vector as a superposition of |0〉 and |1〉:

|ψ〉 ≡ α|0〉+ β|1〉 =

[αβ

],

where α, β ∈ C and |α|2 + |β|2 = 1. Note that 〈ψ| =[α∗ β∗

]and

〈ϕ|ψ〉 denotes the inner product of vectors |ψ〉 and |ϕ〉.The unit vector |ψ〉 leads to the following quantum state:

|ψ〉〈ψ| =

[|α|2 αβ∗

βα∗ |β|2].

The difference between this quantum state and the others we’veconsidered so far is the presence of off-diagonal elements in thedensity matrix (called quantum coherences).

This state is physically distinct from

[|α|2 0

0 |β|2]

.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 13 / 113

Page 53: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Superpositions of quantum states

Construct the following unit vector as a superposition of |0〉 and |1〉:

|ψ〉 ≡ α|0〉+ β|1〉 =

[αβ

],

where α, β ∈ C and |α|2 + |β|2 = 1. Note that 〈ψ| =[α∗ β∗

]and

〈ϕ|ψ〉 denotes the inner product of vectors |ψ〉 and |ϕ〉.

The unit vector |ψ〉 leads to the following quantum state:

|ψ〉〈ψ| =

[|α|2 αβ∗

βα∗ |β|2].

The difference between this quantum state and the others we’veconsidered so far is the presence of off-diagonal elements in thedensity matrix (called quantum coherences).

This state is physically distinct from

[|α|2 0

0 |β|2]

.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 13 / 113

Page 54: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Superpositions of quantum states

Construct the following unit vector as a superposition of |0〉 and |1〉:

|ψ〉 ≡ α|0〉+ β|1〉 =

[αβ

],

where α, β ∈ C and |α|2 + |β|2 = 1. Note that 〈ψ| =[α∗ β∗

]and

〈ϕ|ψ〉 denotes the inner product of vectors |ψ〉 and |ϕ〉.The unit vector |ψ〉 leads to the following quantum state:

|ψ〉〈ψ| =

[|α|2 αβ∗

βα∗ |β|2].

The difference between this quantum state and the others we’veconsidered so far is the presence of off-diagonal elements in thedensity matrix (called quantum coherences).

This state is physically distinct from

[|α|2 0

0 |β|2]

.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 13 / 113

Page 55: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Superpositions of quantum states

Construct the following unit vector as a superposition of |0〉 and |1〉:

|ψ〉 ≡ α|0〉+ β|1〉 =

[αβ

],

where α, β ∈ C and |α|2 + |β|2 = 1. Note that 〈ψ| =[α∗ β∗

]and

〈ϕ|ψ〉 denotes the inner product of vectors |ψ〉 and |ϕ〉.The unit vector |ψ〉 leads to the following quantum state:

|ψ〉〈ψ| =

[|α|2 αβ∗

βα∗ |β|2].

The difference between this quantum state and the others we’veconsidered so far is the presence of off-diagonal elements in thedensity matrix (called quantum coherences).

This state is physically distinct from

[|α|2 0

0 |β|2]

.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 13 / 113

Page 56: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Superpositions of quantum states

Construct the following unit vector as a superposition of |0〉 and |1〉:

|ψ〉 ≡ α|0〉+ β|1〉 =

[αβ

],

where α, β ∈ C and |α|2 + |β|2 = 1. Note that 〈ψ| =[α∗ β∗

]and

〈ϕ|ψ〉 denotes the inner product of vectors |ψ〉 and |ϕ〉.The unit vector |ψ〉 leads to the following quantum state:

|ψ〉〈ψ| =

[|α|2 αβ∗

βα∗ |β|2].

The difference between this quantum state and the others we’veconsidered so far is the presence of off-diagonal elements in thedensity matrix (called quantum coherences).

This state is physically distinct from

[|α|2 0

0 |β|2]

.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 13 / 113

Page 57: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bloch sphere

We can visualize the state of a qubit using the Bloch sphere. To seethis, consider the Pauli matrices

I ≡[

1 00 1

], X ≡

[0 11 0

], Y ≡

[0 −ii 0

], Z ≡

[1 00 −1

].

The last three Pauli matrices have eigenvalues ±1 and eigenvectors:

|±〉 ≡ 1√2

(|0〉 ± |1〉) , |±Y 〉 ≡1√2

(|0〉 ± i |1〉) , |0〉, |1〉.

We can write the density matrix ρ of a qubit in terms of threeparameters rx , ry , and rz :

ρ =1

2(I + rxX + ryY + rzZ ) ,

where r2x + r2

y + r2z ≤ 1, which is the equation of a unit sphere in R3.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 14 / 113

Page 58: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bloch sphere

We can visualize the state of a qubit using the Bloch sphere. To seethis, consider the Pauli matrices

I ≡[

1 00 1

], X ≡

[0 11 0

], Y ≡

[0 −ii 0

], Z ≡

[1 00 −1

].

The last three Pauli matrices have eigenvalues ±1 and eigenvectors:

|±〉 ≡ 1√2

(|0〉 ± |1〉) , |±Y 〉 ≡1√2

(|0〉 ± i |1〉) , |0〉, |1〉.

We can write the density matrix ρ of a qubit in terms of threeparameters rx , ry , and rz :

ρ =1

2(I + rxX + ryY + rzZ ) ,

where r2x + r2

y + r2z ≤ 1, which is the equation of a unit sphere in R3.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 14 / 113

Page 59: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bloch sphere

We can visualize the state of a qubit using the Bloch sphere. To seethis, consider the Pauli matrices

I ≡[

1 00 1

], X ≡

[0 11 0

], Y ≡

[0 −ii 0

], Z ≡

[1 00 −1

].

The last three Pauli matrices have eigenvalues ±1 and eigenvectors:

|±〉 ≡ 1√2

(|0〉 ± |1〉) , |±Y 〉 ≡1√2

(|0〉 ± i |1〉) , |0〉, |1〉.

We can write the density matrix ρ of a qubit in terms of threeparameters rx , ry , and rz :

ρ =1

2(I + rxX + ryY + rzZ ) ,

where r2x + r2

y + r2z ≤ 1, which is the equation of a unit sphere in R3.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 14 / 113

Page 60: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bloch sphere

We can visualize the state of a qubit using the Bloch sphere:

The maximally mixed state I/2 = (|0〉〈0|+ |1〉〈1|)/2 is at the center.

Classical states are on the line going from |0〉 to |1〉.A quantum state is pure if it is on the surface and otherwise mixed.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 15 / 113

Page 61: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bloch sphere

We can visualize the state of a qubit using the Bloch sphere:

The maximally mixed state I/2 = (|0〉〈0|+ |1〉〈1|)/2 is at the center.

Classical states are on the line going from |0〉 to |1〉.A quantum state is pure if it is on the surface and otherwise mixed.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 15 / 113

Page 62: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bloch sphere

We can visualize the state of a qubit using the Bloch sphere:

The maximally mixed state I/2 = (|0〉〈0|+ |1〉〈1|)/2 is at the center.

Classical states are on the line going from |0〉 to |1〉.

A quantum state is pure if it is on the surface and otherwise mixed.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 15 / 113

Page 63: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bloch sphere

We can visualize the state of a qubit using the Bloch sphere:

The maximally mixed state I/2 = (|0〉〈0|+ |1〉〈1|)/2 is at the center.

Classical states are on the line going from |0〉 to |1〉.A quantum state is pure if it is on the surface and otherwise mixed.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 15 / 113

Page 64: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Higher dimensional quantum systems

A density matrix can have dimension ≥ 2 and can be written as

ρ =∑i ,j

ρi ,j |i〉〈j |,

where {|i〉 ≡ ei} is the standard basis and ρi ,j are the matrix elements.

Since every density matrix is positive semi-definite and has traceequal to one, it has a spectral decomposition as

ρ =∑x

pX (x)|φx〉〈φx |,

where {pX (x)} are the non-negative eigenvalues, summing to one,and {|φx〉} is a set of orthonormal eigenvectors.

A density matrix ρ is pure if there exists a unit vector |ψ〉 such thatρ = |ψ〉〈ψ| and otherwise it is mixed.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 16 / 113

Page 65: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Higher dimensional quantum systems

A density matrix can have dimension ≥ 2 and can be written as

ρ =∑i ,j

ρi ,j |i〉〈j |,

where {|i〉 ≡ ei} is the standard basis and ρi ,j are the matrix elements.

Since every density matrix is positive semi-definite and has traceequal to one, it has a spectral decomposition as

ρ =∑x

pX (x)|φx〉〈φx |,

where {pX (x)} are the non-negative eigenvalues, summing to one,and {|φx〉} is a set of orthonormal eigenvectors.

A density matrix ρ is pure if there exists a unit vector |ψ〉 such thatρ = |ψ〉〈ψ| and otherwise it is mixed.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 16 / 113

Page 66: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Higher dimensional quantum systems

A density matrix can have dimension ≥ 2 and can be written as

ρ =∑i ,j

ρi ,j |i〉〈j |,

where {|i〉 ≡ ei} is the standard basis and ρi ,j are the matrix elements.

Since every density matrix is positive semi-definite and has traceequal to one, it has a spectral decomposition as

ρ =∑x

pX (x)|φx〉〈φx |,

where {pX (x)} are the non-negative eigenvalues, summing to one,and {|φx〉} is a set of orthonormal eigenvectors.

A density matrix ρ is pure if there exists a unit vector |ψ〉 such thatρ = |ψ〉〈ψ| and otherwise it is mixed.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 16 / 113

Page 67: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Higher dimensional quantum systems

A density matrix can have dimension ≥ 2 and can be written as

ρ =∑i ,j

ρi ,j |i〉〈j |,

where {|i〉 ≡ ei} is the standard basis and ρi ,j are the matrix elements.

Since every density matrix is positive semi-definite and has traceequal to one, it has a spectral decomposition as

ρ =∑x

pX (x)|φx〉〈φx |,

where {pX (x)} are the non-negative eigenvalues, summing to one,and {|φx〉} is a set of orthonormal eigenvectors.

A density matrix ρ is pure if there exists a unit vector |ψ〉 such thatρ = |ψ〉〈ψ| and otherwise it is mixed.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 16 / 113

Page 68: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Multiple qubits...

IBM five-qubit universal quantum computer (released May 2016)

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 17 / 113

Page 69: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Composite quantum systems

Just as we need more than one bit for information processing tobecome interesting, quantum information really only becomesinteresting when multiple quantum systems can interact.

We use Cartesian product to represent state of two or more bits:

(0, 0), (0, 1), (1, 0), (1, 1) ∈ Z2 × Z2,

but Cartesian product is not rich enough to capture quantum states.

Consider that before we constructed a quantum state from asuperposition of two unit vectors. So we could imagine constructing aquantum state from a superposition of vectors as

α|0, 0〉+ β|0, 1〉+ γ|1, 0〉+ δ|1, 1〉,

where |α|2 + |β|2 + |γ|2 + |δ|2 = 1. But what are |i , j〉?

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 18 / 113

Page 70: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Composite quantum systems

Just as we need more than one bit for information processing tobecome interesting, quantum information really only becomesinteresting when multiple quantum systems can interact.

We use Cartesian product to represent state of two or more bits:

(0, 0), (0, 1), (1, 0), (1, 1) ∈ Z2 × Z2,

but Cartesian product is not rich enough to capture quantum states.

Consider that before we constructed a quantum state from asuperposition of two unit vectors. So we could imagine constructing aquantum state from a superposition of vectors as

α|0, 0〉+ β|0, 1〉+ γ|1, 0〉+ δ|1, 1〉,

where |α|2 + |β|2 + |γ|2 + |δ|2 = 1. But what are |i , j〉?

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 18 / 113

Page 71: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Composite quantum systems

Just as we need more than one bit for information processing tobecome interesting, quantum information really only becomesinteresting when multiple quantum systems can interact.

We use Cartesian product to represent state of two or more bits:

(0, 0), (0, 1), (1, 0), (1, 1) ∈ Z2 × Z2,

but Cartesian product is not rich enough to capture quantum states.

Consider that before we constructed a quantum state from asuperposition of two unit vectors. So we could imagine constructing aquantum state from a superposition of vectors as

α|0, 0〉+ β|0, 1〉+ γ|1, 0〉+ δ|1, 1〉,

where |α|2 + |β|2 + |γ|2 + |δ|2 = 1. But what are |i , j〉?

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 18 / 113

Page 72: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Composite quantum systems

Just as we need more than one bit for information processing tobecome interesting, quantum information really only becomesinteresting when multiple quantum systems can interact.

We use Cartesian product to represent state of two or more bits:

(0, 0), (0, 1), (1, 0), (1, 1) ∈ Z2 × Z2,

but Cartesian product is not rich enough to capture quantum states.

Consider that before we constructed a quantum state from asuperposition of two unit vectors. So we could imagine constructing aquantum state from a superposition of vectors as

α|0, 0〉+ β|0, 1〉+ γ|1, 0〉+ δ|1, 1〉,

where |α|2 + |β|2 + |γ|2 + |δ|2 = 1. But what are |i , j〉?

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 18 / 113

Page 73: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tensor product

We use the tensor product to represent multiple quantum systems.

For vectors, it is defined as

[a1

b1

]⊗[

a2

b2

]≡

a1

[a2

b2

]b1

[a2

b2

] =

a1a2

a1b2

b1a2

b1b2

.So, then with this definition, we have

|ϕ〉 ≡ α|0〉 ⊗ |0〉+ β|0〉 ⊗ |1〉+ γ|1〉 ⊗ |0〉+ δ|1〉 ⊗ |1〉 =

αβγδ

,which leads to a two-qubit density operator |ϕ〉〈ϕ|.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 19 / 113

Page 74: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tensor product

We use the tensor product to represent multiple quantum systems.

For vectors, it is defined as

[a1

b1

]⊗[

a2

b2

]≡

a1

[a2

b2

]b1

[a2

b2

] =

a1a2

a1b2

b1a2

b1b2

.So, then with this definition, we have

|ϕ〉 ≡ α|0〉 ⊗ |0〉+ β|0〉 ⊗ |1〉+ γ|1〉 ⊗ |0〉+ δ|1〉 ⊗ |1〉 =

αβγδ

,which leads to a two-qubit density operator |ϕ〉〈ϕ|.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 19 / 113

Page 75: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tensor product

We use the tensor product to represent multiple quantum systems.

For vectors, it is defined as

[a1

b1

]⊗[

a2

b2

]≡

a1

[a2

b2

]b1

[a2

b2

] =

a1a2

a1b2

b1a2

b1b2

.

So, then with this definition, we have

|ϕ〉 ≡ α|0〉 ⊗ |0〉+ β|0〉 ⊗ |1〉+ γ|1〉 ⊗ |0〉+ δ|1〉 ⊗ |1〉 =

αβγδ

,which leads to a two-qubit density operator |ϕ〉〈ϕ|.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 19 / 113

Page 76: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tensor product

We use the tensor product to represent multiple quantum systems.

For vectors, it is defined as

[a1

b1

]⊗[

a2

b2

]≡

a1

[a2

b2

]b1

[a2

b2

] =

a1a2

a1b2

b1a2

b1b2

.So, then with this definition, we have

|ϕ〉 ≡ α|0〉 ⊗ |0〉+ β|0〉 ⊗ |1〉+ γ|1〉 ⊗ |0〉+ δ|1〉 ⊗ |1〉 =

αβγδ

,which leads to a two-qubit density operator |ϕ〉〈ϕ|.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 19 / 113

Page 77: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

System labels

Often it can be helpful to write system labels, which indicate whichqubit Alice possesses and which Bob possesses:

|ϕ〉AB ≡ α|0〉A ⊗ |0〉B + β|0〉A ⊗ |1〉B + γ|1〉A ⊗ |0〉B + δ|1〉A ⊗ |1〉B .

We can also write the labels on the two-qubit density operator:

|ϕ〉〈ϕ|AB .

Often we abbreviate the above more simply as

α|00〉AB + β|01〉AB + γ|10〉AB + δ|11〉AB .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 20 / 113

Page 78: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

System labels

Often it can be helpful to write system labels, which indicate whichqubit Alice possesses and which Bob possesses:

|ϕ〉AB ≡ α|0〉A ⊗ |0〉B + β|0〉A ⊗ |1〉B + γ|1〉A ⊗ |0〉B + δ|1〉A ⊗ |1〉B .

We can also write the labels on the two-qubit density operator:

|ϕ〉〈ϕ|AB .

Often we abbreviate the above more simply as

α|00〉AB + β|01〉AB + γ|10〉AB + δ|11〉AB .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 20 / 113

Page 79: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

System labels

Often it can be helpful to write system labels, which indicate whichqubit Alice possesses and which Bob possesses:

|ϕ〉AB ≡ α|0〉A ⊗ |0〉B + β|0〉A ⊗ |1〉B + γ|1〉A ⊗ |0〉B + δ|1〉A ⊗ |1〉B .

We can also write the labels on the two-qubit density operator:

|ϕ〉〈ϕ|AB .

Often we abbreviate the above more simply as

α|00〉AB + β|01〉AB + γ|10〉AB + δ|11〉AB .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 20 / 113

Page 80: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tensor product for matrices

For matrices K and L, the tensor product is defined in a similar way:

K ⊗ L ≡[k11 k12

k21 k22

]⊗[l11 l12

l21 l22

]

k11

[l11 l12

l21 l22

]k12

[l11 l12

l21 l22

]k21

[l11 l12

l21 l22

]k22

[l11 l12

l21 l22

]

=

k11l11 k11l12 k12l11 k12l12

k11l21 k11l22 k12l21 k12l22

k21l11 k21l12 k22l11 k22l12

k21l21 k21l22 k22l21 k22l22

.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 21 / 113

Page 81: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tensor product for matrices

For matrices K and L, the tensor product is defined in a similar way:

K ⊗ L ≡[k11 k12

k21 k22

]⊗[l11 l12

l21 l22

]

k11

[l11 l12

l21 l22

]k12

[l11 l12

l21 l22

]k21

[l11 l12

l21 l22

]k22

[l11 l12

l21 l22

]

=

k11l11 k11l12 k12l11 k12l12

k11l21 k11l22 k12l21 k12l22

k21l11 k21l12 k22l11 k22l12

k21l21 k21l22 k22l21 k22l22

.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 21 / 113

Page 82: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Properties of tensor product

For vectors:

z(|φ〉 ⊗ |ψ〉) = (z |φ〉)⊗ |ψ〉 = |φ〉 ⊗ (z |ψ〉),(|φ1〉+ |φ2〉)⊗ |ψ〉 = |φ1〉 ⊗ |ψ〉+ |φ2〉 ⊗ |ψ〉,|φ〉 ⊗ (|ψ1〉+ |ψ2〉) = |φ〉 ⊗ |ψ1〉+ |φ〉 ⊗ |ψ2〉.

Matrices acting on vectors:

(K ⊗ L)(|φ〉 ⊗ |ψ〉) = K |φ〉 ⊗ L|ψ〉,

(K ⊗ L)

(∑x

λx |φx〉 ⊗ |ψx〉

)=∑x

λxK |φx〉 ⊗ L|ψx〉,(∑x

µxKx ⊗ Lx

)(|φ〉 ⊗ |ψ〉) =

∑x

µxKx |φ〉 ⊗ Lx |ψ〉.

Inner product: (〈φ1| ⊗ 〈ψ1|)(|φ2〉 ⊗ |ψ2〉) = 〈φ1|φ2〉〈ψ1|ψ2〉.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 22 / 113

Page 83: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Properties of tensor product

For vectors:

z(|φ〉 ⊗ |ψ〉) = (z |φ〉)⊗ |ψ〉 = |φ〉 ⊗ (z |ψ〉),(|φ1〉+ |φ2〉)⊗ |ψ〉 = |φ1〉 ⊗ |ψ〉+ |φ2〉 ⊗ |ψ〉,|φ〉 ⊗ (|ψ1〉+ |ψ2〉) = |φ〉 ⊗ |ψ1〉+ |φ〉 ⊗ |ψ2〉.

Matrices acting on vectors:

(K ⊗ L)(|φ〉 ⊗ |ψ〉) = K |φ〉 ⊗ L|ψ〉,

(K ⊗ L)

(∑x

λx |φx〉 ⊗ |ψx〉

)=∑x

λxK |φx〉 ⊗ L|ψx〉,(∑x

µxKx ⊗ Lx

)(|φ〉 ⊗ |ψ〉) =

∑x

µxKx |φ〉 ⊗ Lx |ψ〉.

Inner product: (〈φ1| ⊗ 〈ψ1|)(|φ2〉 ⊗ |ψ2〉) = 〈φ1|φ2〉〈ψ1|ψ2〉.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 22 / 113

Page 84: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Properties of tensor product

For vectors:

z(|φ〉 ⊗ |ψ〉) = (z |φ〉)⊗ |ψ〉 = |φ〉 ⊗ (z |ψ〉),(|φ1〉+ |φ2〉)⊗ |ψ〉 = |φ1〉 ⊗ |ψ〉+ |φ2〉 ⊗ |ψ〉,|φ〉 ⊗ (|ψ1〉+ |ψ2〉) = |φ〉 ⊗ |ψ1〉+ |φ〉 ⊗ |ψ2〉.

Matrices acting on vectors:

(K ⊗ L)(|φ〉 ⊗ |ψ〉) = K |φ〉 ⊗ L|ψ〉,

(K ⊗ L)

(∑x

λx |φx〉 ⊗ |ψx〉

)=∑x

λxK |φx〉 ⊗ L|ψx〉,(∑x

µxKx ⊗ Lx

)(|φ〉 ⊗ |ψ〉) =

∑x

µxKx |φ〉 ⊗ Lx |ψ〉.

Inner product: (〈φ1| ⊗ 〈ψ1|)(|φ2〉 ⊗ |ψ2〉) = 〈φ1|φ2〉〈ψ1|ψ2〉.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 22 / 113

Page 85: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Properties of tensor product

For vectors:

z(|φ〉 ⊗ |ψ〉) = (z |φ〉)⊗ |ψ〉 = |φ〉 ⊗ (z |ψ〉),(|φ1〉+ |φ2〉)⊗ |ψ〉 = |φ1〉 ⊗ |ψ〉+ |φ2〉 ⊗ |ψ〉,|φ〉 ⊗ (|ψ1〉+ |ψ2〉) = |φ〉 ⊗ |ψ1〉+ |φ〉 ⊗ |ψ2〉.

Matrices acting on vectors:

(K ⊗ L)(|φ〉 ⊗ |ψ〉) = K |φ〉 ⊗ L|ψ〉,

(K ⊗ L)

(∑x

λx |φx〉 ⊗ |ψx〉

)=∑x

λxK |φx〉 ⊗ L|ψx〉,(∑x

µxKx ⊗ Lx

)(|φ〉 ⊗ |ψ〉) =

∑x

µxKx |φ〉 ⊗ Lx |ψ〉.

Inner product: (〈φ1| ⊗ 〈ψ1|)(|φ2〉 ⊗ |ψ2〉) = 〈φ1|φ2〉〈ψ1|ψ2〉.Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 22 / 113

Page 86: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Composite quantum systems

If the state of Alice’s system is ρ and the state of Bob’s system is σand they have never interacted in the past, then the state of the jointAlice-Bob system is

ρA ⊗ σB .

We use the system labels to say who has what.

For example, their state could be

|0〉〈0|A ⊗ |0〉〈0|B , or

|1〉〈1|A ⊗ |1〉〈1|B ,

or a mixture of both, with p ∈ [0, 1]:

p|0〉〈0|A ⊗ |0〉〈0|B + (1− p)|1〉〈1|A ⊗ |1〉〈1|B .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 23 / 113

Page 87: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Composite quantum systems

If the state of Alice’s system is ρ and the state of Bob’s system is σand they have never interacted in the past, then the state of the jointAlice-Bob system is

ρA ⊗ σB .

We use the system labels to say who has what.

For example, their state could be

|0〉〈0|A ⊗ |0〉〈0|B , or

|1〉〈1|A ⊗ |1〉〈1|B ,

or a mixture of both, with p ∈ [0, 1]:

p|0〉〈0|A ⊗ |0〉〈0|B + (1− p)|1〉〈1|A ⊗ |1〉〈1|B .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 23 / 113

Page 88: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Composite quantum systems

If the state of Alice’s system is ρ and the state of Bob’s system is σand they have never interacted in the past, then the state of the jointAlice-Bob system is

ρA ⊗ σB .

We use the system labels to say who has what.

For example, their state could be

|0〉〈0|A ⊗ |0〉〈0|B , or

|1〉〈1|A ⊗ |1〉〈1|B ,

or a mixture of both, with p ∈ [0, 1]:

p|0〉〈0|A ⊗ |0〉〈0|B + (1− p)|1〉〈1|A ⊗ |1〉〈1|B .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 23 / 113

Page 89: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Composite quantum systems

If the state of Alice’s system is ρ and the state of Bob’s system is σand they have never interacted in the past, then the state of the jointAlice-Bob system is

ρA ⊗ σB .

We use the system labels to say who has what.

For example, their state could be

|0〉〈0|A ⊗ |0〉〈0|B , or

|1〉〈1|A ⊗ |1〉〈1|B ,

or a mixture of both, with p ∈ [0, 1]:

p|0〉〈0|A ⊗ |0〉〈0|B + (1− p)|1〉〈1|A ⊗ |1〉〈1|B .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 23 / 113

Page 90: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum entanglement...

Depiction of quantum entanglement taken fromhttp://thelifeofpsi.com/2013/10/28/bertlmanns-socks/

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 24 / 113

Page 91: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Separable states and entangled states

If Alice and Bob prepare states ρxA and σxB based on a randomvariable X with distribution pX , then the state of their systems is∑

x

pX (x)ρxA ⊗ σxB .

Such states are called separable states and can be prepared usinglocal operations and classical communication (no need for a quantuminteraction between A and B to prepare these states).

By spectral decomposition, every separable state can be written as∑z

pZ (z)|ψz〉〈ψz |A ⊗ |φz〉〈φz |B ,

where, for each z , |ψz〉A and |φz〉B are unit vectors.

Entangled states are states that cannot be written in the above form.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 25 / 113

Page 92: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Separable states and entangled states

If Alice and Bob prepare states ρxA and σxB based on a randomvariable X with distribution pX , then the state of their systems is∑

x

pX (x)ρxA ⊗ σxB .

Such states are called separable states and can be prepared usinglocal operations and classical communication (no need for a quantuminteraction between A and B to prepare these states).

By spectral decomposition, every separable state can be written as∑z

pZ (z)|ψz〉〈ψz |A ⊗ |φz〉〈φz |B ,

where, for each z , |ψz〉A and |φz〉B are unit vectors.

Entangled states are states that cannot be written in the above form.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 25 / 113

Page 93: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Separable states and entangled states

If Alice and Bob prepare states ρxA and σxB based on a randomvariable X with distribution pX , then the state of their systems is∑

x

pX (x)ρxA ⊗ σxB .

Such states are called separable states and can be prepared usinglocal operations and classical communication (no need for a quantuminteraction between A and B to prepare these states).

By spectral decomposition, every separable state can be written as∑z

pZ (z)|ψz〉〈ψz |A ⊗ |φz〉〈φz |B ,

where, for each z , |ψz〉A and |φz〉B are unit vectors.

Entangled states are states that cannot be written in the above form.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 25 / 113

Page 94: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Separable states and entangled states

If Alice and Bob prepare states ρxA and σxB based on a randomvariable X with distribution pX , then the state of their systems is∑

x

pX (x)ρxA ⊗ σxB .

Such states are called separable states and can be prepared usinglocal operations and classical communication (no need for a quantuminteraction between A and B to prepare these states).

By spectral decomposition, every separable state can be written as∑z

pZ (z)|ψz〉〈ψz |A ⊗ |φz〉〈φz |B ,

where, for each z , |ψz〉A and |φz〉B are unit vectors.

Entangled states are states that cannot be written in the above form.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 25 / 113

Page 95: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Separable states and entangled states

If Alice and Bob prepare states ρxA and σxB based on a randomvariable X with distribution pX , then the state of their systems is∑

x

pX (x)ρxA ⊗ σxB .

Such states are called separable states and can be prepared usinglocal operations and classical communication (no need for a quantuminteraction between A and B to prepare these states).

By spectral decomposition, every separable state can be written as∑z

pZ (z)|ψz〉〈ψz |A ⊗ |φz〉〈φz |B ,

where, for each z , |ψz〉A and |φz〉B are unit vectors.

Entangled states are states that cannot be written in the above form.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 25 / 113

Page 96: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Example of entangled state

A prominent example of an entangled state is the ebit (eee · bit):

|Φ〉〈Φ|AB ,

where |Φ〉AB ≡ 1√2

(|00〉AB + |11〉AB).

In matrix form, this is

|Φ〉〈Φ|AB =1

2

1 0 0 10 0 0 00 0 0 01 0 0 1

.To see that this is entangled, consider that for every |ψ〉A and |φ〉B

|〈Φ|AB |ψ〉A ⊗ |φ〉B |2 ≤1

2

⇒ impossible to write |Φ〉〈Φ|AB as a separable state.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 26 / 113

Page 97: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Example of entangled state

A prominent example of an entangled state is the ebit (eee · bit):

|Φ〉〈Φ|AB ,

where |Φ〉AB ≡ 1√2

(|00〉AB + |11〉AB).

In matrix form, this is

|Φ〉〈Φ|AB =1

2

1 0 0 10 0 0 00 0 0 01 0 0 1

.To see that this is entangled, consider that for every |ψ〉A and |φ〉B

|〈Φ|AB |ψ〉A ⊗ |φ〉B |2 ≤1

2

⇒ impossible to write |Φ〉〈Φ|AB as a separable state.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 26 / 113

Page 98: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Example of entangled state

A prominent example of an entangled state is the ebit (eee · bit):

|Φ〉〈Φ|AB ,

where |Φ〉AB ≡ 1√2

(|00〉AB + |11〉AB).

In matrix form, this is

|Φ〉〈Φ|AB =1

2

1 0 0 10 0 0 00 0 0 01 0 0 1

.

To see that this is entangled, consider that for every |ψ〉A and |φ〉B

|〈Φ|AB |ψ〉A ⊗ |φ〉B |2 ≤1

2

⇒ impossible to write |Φ〉〈Φ|AB as a separable state.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 26 / 113

Page 99: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Example of entangled state

A prominent example of an entangled state is the ebit (eee · bit):

|Φ〉〈Φ|AB ,

where |Φ〉AB ≡ 1√2

(|00〉AB + |11〉AB).

In matrix form, this is

|Φ〉〈Φ|AB =1

2

1 0 0 10 0 0 00 0 0 01 0 0 1

.To see that this is entangled, consider that for every |ψ〉A and |φ〉B

|〈Φ|AB |ψ〉A ⊗ |φ〉B |2 ≤1

2

⇒ impossible to write |Φ〉〈Φ|AB as a separable state.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 26 / 113

Page 100: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Example of entangled state

A prominent example of an entangled state is the ebit (eee · bit):

|Φ〉〈Φ|AB ,

where |Φ〉AB ≡ 1√2

(|00〉AB + |11〉AB).

In matrix form, this is

|Φ〉〈Φ|AB =1

2

1 0 0 10 0 0 00 0 0 01 0 0 1

.To see that this is entangled, consider that for every |ψ〉A and |φ〉B

|〈Φ|AB |ψ〉A ⊗ |φ〉B |2 ≤1

2

⇒ impossible to write |Φ〉〈Φ|AB as a separable state.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 26 / 113

Page 101: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tool: Schmidt decomposition

Schmidt decomposition theorem

Given a two-party unit vector |ψ〉AB ∈ HA ⊗HB , we can express it as

|ψ〉AB ≡d−1∑i=0

√pi |i〉A |i〉B , where

probabilities pi are real, strictly positive, and normalized∑

i pi = 1.

{|i〉A} and {|i〉B} are orthonormal bases for systems A and B.[√pi]i∈{0,...,d−1} is the vector of Schmidt coefficients.

Schmidt rank d of |ψ〉AB is equal to the number of Schmidtcoefficients pi in its Schmidt decomposition and satisfies

d ≤ min {dim(HA), dim(HB)} .

State |ψ〉〈ψ|AB is entangled iff d ≥ 2.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 27 / 113

Page 102: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tool: Schmidt decomposition

Schmidt decomposition theorem

Given a two-party unit vector |ψ〉AB ∈ HA ⊗HB , we can express it as

|ψ〉AB ≡d−1∑i=0

√pi |i〉A |i〉B , where

probabilities pi are real, strictly positive, and normalized∑

i pi = 1.

{|i〉A} and {|i〉B} are orthonormal bases for systems A and B.[√pi]i∈{0,...,d−1} is the vector of Schmidt coefficients.

Schmidt rank d of |ψ〉AB is equal to the number of Schmidtcoefficients pi in its Schmidt decomposition and satisfies

d ≤ min {dim(HA), dim(HB)} .

State |ψ〉〈ψ|AB is entangled iff d ≥ 2.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 27 / 113

Page 103: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tool: Schmidt decomposition

Schmidt decomposition theorem

Given a two-party unit vector |ψ〉AB ∈ HA ⊗HB , we can express it as

|ψ〉AB ≡d−1∑i=0

√pi |i〉A |i〉B , where

probabilities pi are real, strictly positive, and normalized∑

i pi = 1.

{|i〉A} and {|i〉B} are orthonormal bases for systems A and B.[√pi]i∈{0,...,d−1} is the vector of Schmidt coefficients.

Schmidt rank d of |ψ〉AB is equal to the number of Schmidtcoefficients pi in its Schmidt decomposition and satisfies

d ≤ min {dim(HA), dim(HB)} .

State |ψ〉〈ψ|AB is entangled iff d ≥ 2.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 27 / 113

Page 104: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tool: Schmidt decomposition

Schmidt decomposition theorem

Given a two-party unit vector |ψ〉AB ∈ HA ⊗HB , we can express it as

|ψ〉AB ≡d−1∑i=0

√pi |i〉A |i〉B , where

probabilities pi are real, strictly positive, and normalized∑

i pi = 1.

{|i〉A} and {|i〉B} are orthonormal bases for systems A and B.

[√pi]i∈{0,...,d−1} is the vector of Schmidt coefficients.

Schmidt rank d of |ψ〉AB is equal to the number of Schmidtcoefficients pi in its Schmidt decomposition and satisfies

d ≤ min {dim(HA), dim(HB)} .

State |ψ〉〈ψ|AB is entangled iff d ≥ 2.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 27 / 113

Page 105: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tool: Schmidt decomposition

Schmidt decomposition theorem

Given a two-party unit vector |ψ〉AB ∈ HA ⊗HB , we can express it as

|ψ〉AB ≡d−1∑i=0

√pi |i〉A |i〉B , where

probabilities pi are real, strictly positive, and normalized∑

i pi = 1.

{|i〉A} and {|i〉B} are orthonormal bases for systems A and B.[√pi]i∈{0,...,d−1} is the vector of Schmidt coefficients.

Schmidt rank d of |ψ〉AB is equal to the number of Schmidtcoefficients pi in its Schmidt decomposition and satisfies

d ≤ min {dim(HA), dim(HB)} .

State |ψ〉〈ψ|AB is entangled iff d ≥ 2.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 27 / 113

Page 106: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tool: Schmidt decomposition

Schmidt decomposition theorem

Given a two-party unit vector |ψ〉AB ∈ HA ⊗HB , we can express it as

|ψ〉AB ≡d−1∑i=0

√pi |i〉A |i〉B , where

probabilities pi are real, strictly positive, and normalized∑

i pi = 1.

{|i〉A} and {|i〉B} are orthonormal bases for systems A and B.[√pi]i∈{0,...,d−1} is the vector of Schmidt coefficients.

Schmidt rank d of |ψ〉AB is equal to the number of Schmidtcoefficients pi in its Schmidt decomposition and satisfies

d ≤ min {dim(HA), dim(HB)} .

State |ψ〉〈ψ|AB is entangled iff d ≥ 2.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 27 / 113

Page 107: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tool: Schmidt decomposition

Schmidt decomposition theorem

Given a two-party unit vector |ψ〉AB ∈ HA ⊗HB , we can express it as

|ψ〉AB ≡d−1∑i=0

√pi |i〉A |i〉B , where

probabilities pi are real, strictly positive, and normalized∑

i pi = 1.

{|i〉A} and {|i〉B} are orthonormal bases for systems A and B.[√pi]i∈{0,...,d−1} is the vector of Schmidt coefficients.

Schmidt rank d of |ψ〉AB is equal to the number of Schmidtcoefficients pi in its Schmidt decomposition and satisfies

d ≤ min {dim(HA), dim(HB)} .

State |ψ〉〈ψ|AB is entangled iff d ≥ 2.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 27 / 113

Page 108: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tool: Partial trace

The trace of a matrix X can be realized as

Tr{X} =∑i

〈i |X |i〉,

where {|i〉} is an orthonormal basis.

Partial trace of a matrix YAB acting on HA ⊗HB can be realized as

TrA{YAB} =∑i

(〈i |A ⊗ IB)YAB(|i〉A ⊗ IB),

where {|i〉A} is an orthonormal basis for HA and IB is the identitymatrix acting on HB .

Both trace and partial trace are linear operations.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 28 / 113

Page 109: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tool: Partial trace

The trace of a matrix X can be realized as

Tr{X} =∑i

〈i |X |i〉,

where {|i〉} is an orthonormal basis.

Partial trace of a matrix YAB acting on HA ⊗HB can be realized as

TrA{YAB} =∑i

(〈i |A ⊗ IB)YAB(|i〉A ⊗ IB),

where {|i〉A} is an orthonormal basis for HA and IB is the identitymatrix acting on HB .

Both trace and partial trace are linear operations.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 28 / 113

Page 110: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tool: Partial trace

The trace of a matrix X can be realized as

Tr{X} =∑i

〈i |X |i〉,

where {|i〉} is an orthonormal basis.

Partial trace of a matrix YAB acting on HA ⊗HB can be realized as

TrA{YAB} =∑i

(〈i |A ⊗ IB)YAB(|i〉A ⊗ IB),

where {|i〉A} is an orthonormal basis for HA and IB is the identitymatrix acting on HB .

Both trace and partial trace are linear operations.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 28 / 113

Page 111: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tool: Partial trace

The trace of a matrix X can be realized as

Tr{X} =∑i

〈i |X |i〉,

where {|i〉} is an orthonormal basis.

Partial trace of a matrix YAB acting on HA ⊗HB can be realized as

TrA{YAB} =∑i

(〈i |A ⊗ IB)YAB(|i〉A ⊗ IB),

where {|i〉A} is an orthonormal basis for HA and IB is the identitymatrix acting on HB .

Both trace and partial trace are linear operations.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 28 / 113

Page 112: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Interpretation of partial trace

Suppose Alice and Bob possess quantum systems in the state ρAB .We calculate the density matrix for Alice’s system using partial trace:

ρA ≡ TrA{ρAB}.

We can then use ρA to predict the outcome of any experimentperformed on Alice’s system alone.

Partial trace generalizes marginalizing a probability distribution:

TrY

{∑x ,y

pX ,Y (x , y)|x〉〈x |X ⊗ |y〉〈y |Y

}=∑x ,y

pX ,Y (x , y)|x〉〈x |X Tr {|y〉〈y |Y }

=∑x

[∑y

pX ,Y (x , y)

]|x〉〈x |X =

∑x

pX (x)|x〉〈x |X ,

where pX (x) ≡∑

y pX ,Y (x , y).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 29 / 113

Page 113: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Interpretation of partial trace

Suppose Alice and Bob possess quantum systems in the state ρAB .We calculate the density matrix for Alice’s system using partial trace:

ρA ≡ TrA{ρAB}.

We can then use ρA to predict the outcome of any experimentperformed on Alice’s system alone.

Partial trace generalizes marginalizing a probability distribution:

TrY

{∑x ,y

pX ,Y (x , y)|x〉〈x |X ⊗ |y〉〈y |Y

}=∑x ,y

pX ,Y (x , y)|x〉〈x |X Tr {|y〉〈y |Y }

=∑x

[∑y

pX ,Y (x , y)

]|x〉〈x |X =

∑x

pX (x)|x〉〈x |X ,

where pX (x) ≡∑

y pX ,Y (x , y).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 29 / 113

Page 114: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Interpretation of partial trace

Suppose Alice and Bob possess quantum systems in the state ρAB .We calculate the density matrix for Alice’s system using partial trace:

ρA ≡ TrA{ρAB}.

We can then use ρA to predict the outcome of any experimentperformed on Alice’s system alone.

Partial trace generalizes marginalizing a probability distribution:

TrY

{∑x ,y

pX ,Y (x , y)|x〉〈x |X ⊗ |y〉〈y |Y

}=∑x ,y

pX ,Y (x , y)|x〉〈x |X Tr {|y〉〈y |Y }

=∑x

[∑y

pX ,Y (x , y)

]|x〉〈x |X =

∑x

pX (x)|x〉〈x |X ,

where pX (x) ≡∑

y pX ,Y (x , y).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 29 / 113

Page 115: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Interpretation of partial trace

Suppose Alice and Bob possess quantum systems in the state ρAB .We calculate the density matrix for Alice’s system using partial trace:

ρA ≡ TrA{ρAB}.

We can then use ρA to predict the outcome of any experimentperformed on Alice’s system alone.

Partial trace generalizes marginalizing a probability distribution:

TrY

{∑x ,y

pX ,Y (x , y)|x〉〈x |X ⊗ |y〉〈y |Y

}=∑x ,y

pX ,Y (x , y)|x〉〈x |X Tr {|y〉〈y |Y }

=∑x

[∑y

pX ,Y (x , y)

]|x〉〈x |X =

∑x

pX (x)|x〉〈x |X ,

where pX (x) ≡∑

y pX ,Y (x , y).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 29 / 113

Page 116: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Purification of quantum noise...

Artistic rendering of the notion of purification(Image courtesy of seaskylab at FreeDigitalPhotos.net)

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 30 / 113

Page 117: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tool: Purification of quantum states

A purification of a state ρS on system S is a pure quantum state|ψ〉〈ψ|RS on systems R and S , such that

ρS = TrR{|ψ〉〈ψ|RS}.

Simple construction: take |ψ〉RS =∑

x

√p(x)|x〉R ⊗ |x〉S if ρS has

spectral decomposition∑

x p(x)|x〉〈x |S .

Two different states |ψ〉〈ψ|RS and |φ〉〈φ|RS purify ρS iff they arerelated by a unitary UR acting on the reference system. Necessity:

TrR{(UR ⊗ IS)|ψ〉〈ψ|RS(U†R ⊗ IS)} = TrR{(U†RUR ⊗ IS)|ψ〉〈ψ|RS}= TrR{|ψ〉〈ψ|RS}= ρS .

To prove sufficiency, use Schmidt decomposition.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 31 / 113

Page 118: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tool: Purification of quantum states

A purification of a state ρS on system S is a pure quantum state|ψ〉〈ψ|RS on systems R and S , such that

ρS = TrR{|ψ〉〈ψ|RS}.

Simple construction: take |ψ〉RS =∑

x

√p(x)|x〉R ⊗ |x〉S if ρS has

spectral decomposition∑

x p(x)|x〉〈x |S .

Two different states |ψ〉〈ψ|RS and |φ〉〈φ|RS purify ρS iff they arerelated by a unitary UR acting on the reference system. Necessity:

TrR{(UR ⊗ IS)|ψ〉〈ψ|RS(U†R ⊗ IS)} = TrR{(U†RUR ⊗ IS)|ψ〉〈ψ|RS}= TrR{|ψ〉〈ψ|RS}= ρS .

To prove sufficiency, use Schmidt decomposition.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 31 / 113

Page 119: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tool: Purification of quantum states

A purification of a state ρS on system S is a pure quantum state|ψ〉〈ψ|RS on systems R and S , such that

ρS = TrR{|ψ〉〈ψ|RS}.

Simple construction: take |ψ〉RS =∑

x

√p(x)|x〉R ⊗ |x〉S if ρS has

spectral decomposition∑

x p(x)|x〉〈x |S .

Two different states |ψ〉〈ψ|RS and |φ〉〈φ|RS purify ρS iff they arerelated by a unitary UR acting on the reference system. Necessity:

TrR{(UR ⊗ IS)|ψ〉〈ψ|RS(U†R ⊗ IS)} = TrR{(U†RUR ⊗ IS)|ψ〉〈ψ|RS}= TrR{|ψ〉〈ψ|RS}= ρS .

To prove sufficiency, use Schmidt decomposition.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 31 / 113

Page 120: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Tool: Purification of quantum states

A purification of a state ρS on system S is a pure quantum state|ψ〉〈ψ|RS on systems R and S , such that

ρS = TrR{|ψ〉〈ψ|RS}.

Simple construction: take |ψ〉RS =∑

x

√p(x)|x〉R ⊗ |x〉S if ρS has

spectral decomposition∑

x p(x)|x〉〈x |S .

Two different states |ψ〉〈ψ|RS and |φ〉〈φ|RS purify ρS iff they arerelated by a unitary UR acting on the reference system. Necessity:

TrR{(UR ⊗ IS)|ψ〉〈ψ|RS(U†R ⊗ IS)} = TrR{(U†RUR ⊗ IS)|ψ〉〈ψ|RS}= TrR{|ψ〉〈ψ|RS}= ρS .

To prove sufficiency, use Schmidt decomposition.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 31 / 113

Page 121: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Uses and interpretations of purification

The concept of purification is one of the most often used tools inquantum information theory.

This concept does not exist in classical information theory andrepresents a radical departure (i.e., in classical information theory it isnot possible to have a definite state of two systems such that thereduced systems are individually indefinite).

Physical interpretation: Noise or mixedness in a quantum state is dueto entanglement with an inaccessible reference / environment system.

Cryptographic interpretation: In the setting of quantum cryptography,we assume that an eavesdropper Eve has access to the fullpurification of a state ρAB that Alice and Bob share. This meansphysically that Eve has access to every other system in the universethat Alice and Bob do not have access to!

Advantage: only need to characterize Alice and Bob’s state in orderto understand what Eve has.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 32 / 113

Page 122: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Uses and interpretations of purification

The concept of purification is one of the most often used tools inquantum information theory.

This concept does not exist in classical information theory andrepresents a radical departure (i.e., in classical information theory it isnot possible to have a definite state of two systems such that thereduced systems are individually indefinite).

Physical interpretation: Noise or mixedness in a quantum state is dueto entanglement with an inaccessible reference / environment system.

Cryptographic interpretation: In the setting of quantum cryptography,we assume that an eavesdropper Eve has access to the fullpurification of a state ρAB that Alice and Bob share. This meansphysically that Eve has access to every other system in the universethat Alice and Bob do not have access to!

Advantage: only need to characterize Alice and Bob’s state in orderto understand what Eve has.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 32 / 113

Page 123: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Uses and interpretations of purification

The concept of purification is one of the most often used tools inquantum information theory.

This concept does not exist in classical information theory andrepresents a radical departure (i.e., in classical information theory it isnot possible to have a definite state of two systems such that thereduced systems are individually indefinite).

Physical interpretation: Noise or mixedness in a quantum state is dueto entanglement with an inaccessible reference / environment system.

Cryptographic interpretation: In the setting of quantum cryptography,we assume that an eavesdropper Eve has access to the fullpurification of a state ρAB that Alice and Bob share. This meansphysically that Eve has access to every other system in the universethat Alice and Bob do not have access to!

Advantage: only need to characterize Alice and Bob’s state in orderto understand what Eve has.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 32 / 113

Page 124: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Uses and interpretations of purification

The concept of purification is one of the most often used tools inquantum information theory.

This concept does not exist in classical information theory andrepresents a radical departure (i.e., in classical information theory it isnot possible to have a definite state of two systems such that thereduced systems are individually indefinite).

Physical interpretation: Noise or mixedness in a quantum state is dueto entanglement with an inaccessible reference / environment system.

Cryptographic interpretation: In the setting of quantum cryptography,we assume that an eavesdropper Eve has access to the fullpurification of a state ρAB that Alice and Bob share. This meansphysically that Eve has access to every other system in the universethat Alice and Bob do not have access to!

Advantage: only need to characterize Alice and Bob’s state in orderto understand what Eve has.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 32 / 113

Page 125: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Uses and interpretations of purification

The concept of purification is one of the most often used tools inquantum information theory.

This concept does not exist in classical information theory andrepresents a radical departure (i.e., in classical information theory it isnot possible to have a definite state of two systems such that thereduced systems are individually indefinite).

Physical interpretation: Noise or mixedness in a quantum state is dueto entanglement with an inaccessible reference / environment system.

Cryptographic interpretation: In the setting of quantum cryptography,we assume that an eavesdropper Eve has access to the fullpurification of a state ρAB that Alice and Bob share. This meansphysically that Eve has access to every other system in the universethat Alice and Bob do not have access to!

Advantage: only need to characterize Alice and Bob’s state in orderto understand what Eve has.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 32 / 113

Page 126: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Uses and interpretations of purification

The concept of purification is one of the most often used tools inquantum information theory.

This concept does not exist in classical information theory andrepresents a radical departure (i.e., in classical information theory it isnot possible to have a definite state of two systems such that thereduced systems are individually indefinite).

Physical interpretation: Noise or mixedness in a quantum state is dueto entanglement with an inaccessible reference / environment system.

Cryptographic interpretation: In the setting of quantum cryptography,we assume that an eavesdropper Eve has access to the fullpurification of a state ρAB that Alice and Bob share. This meansphysically that Eve has access to every other system in the universethat Alice and Bob do not have access to!

Advantage: only need to characterize Alice and Bob’s state in orderto understand what Eve has.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 32 / 113

Page 127: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum channels

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 33 / 113

Page 128: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Classical channels

Classical channels model evolutions of classical systems.

What are the requirements that we make for classical channels?

1) They should be linear maps, which means they respect convexity.

2) They should take probability distributions to probabilitydistributions (i.e., they should output a legitimate state of a classicalsystem when a classical state is input).

These requirements imply that the evolution of a classical system isspecified by a conditional probability matrix N with entries pY |X (y |x),so that the input-output relationship of a classical channel is given by

pY = N pX ⇐⇒ pY (y) =∑x

pY |X (y |x)pX (x).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 34 / 113

Page 129: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Classical channels

Classical channels model evolutions of classical systems.

What are the requirements that we make for classical channels?

1) They should be linear maps, which means they respect convexity.

2) They should take probability distributions to probabilitydistributions (i.e., they should output a legitimate state of a classicalsystem when a classical state is input).

These requirements imply that the evolution of a classical system isspecified by a conditional probability matrix N with entries pY |X (y |x),so that the input-output relationship of a classical channel is given by

pY = N pX ⇐⇒ pY (y) =∑x

pY |X (y |x)pX (x).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 34 / 113

Page 130: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Classical channels

Classical channels model evolutions of classical systems.

What are the requirements that we make for classical channels?

1) They should be linear maps, which means they respect convexity.

2) They should take probability distributions to probabilitydistributions (i.e., they should output a legitimate state of a classicalsystem when a classical state is input).

These requirements imply that the evolution of a classical system isspecified by a conditional probability matrix N with entries pY |X (y |x),so that the input-output relationship of a classical channel is given by

pY = N pX ⇐⇒ pY (y) =∑x

pY |X (y |x)pX (x).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 34 / 113

Page 131: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Classical channels

Classical channels model evolutions of classical systems.

What are the requirements that we make for classical channels?

1) They should be linear maps, which means they respect convexity.

2) They should take probability distributions to probabilitydistributions (i.e., they should output a legitimate state of a classicalsystem when a classical state is input).

These requirements imply that the evolution of a classical system isspecified by a conditional probability matrix N with entries pY |X (y |x),so that the input-output relationship of a classical channel is given by

pY = N pX ⇐⇒ pY (y) =∑x

pY |X (y |x)pX (x).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 34 / 113

Page 132: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Classical channels

Classical channels model evolutions of classical systems.

What are the requirements that we make for classical channels?

1) They should be linear maps, which means they respect convexity.

2) They should take probability distributions to probabilitydistributions (i.e., they should output a legitimate state of a classicalsystem when a classical state is input).

These requirements imply that the evolution of a classical system isspecified by a conditional probability matrix N with entries pY |X (y |x),so that the input-output relationship of a classical channel is given by

pY = N pX ⇐⇒ pY (y) =∑x

pY |X (y |x)pX (x).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 34 / 113

Page 133: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Classical channels

Classical channels model evolutions of classical systems.

What are the requirements that we make for classical channels?

1) They should be linear maps, which means they respect convexity.

2) They should take probability distributions to probabilitydistributions (i.e., they should output a legitimate state of a classicalsystem when a classical state is input).

These requirements imply that the evolution of a classical system isspecified by a conditional probability matrix N with entries pY |X (y |x),so that the input-output relationship of a classical channel is given by

pY = N pX ⇐⇒ pY (y) =∑x

pY |X (y |x)pX (x).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 34 / 113

Page 134: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum channels

Quantum channels model evolutions of quantum systems.

We make similar requirements:

A quantum channel N is a linear map acting on the space of(density) matrices:

N (pρ+ (1− p)σ) = pN (ρ) + (1− p)N (σ),

where p ∈ [0, 1] and ρ, σ ∈ D(H).

We demand that a quantum channel should take quantum states toquantum states.

This means that it should be trace (probability) preserving:

Tr{N (X )} = Tr{X}

for all X ∈ L(H) (linear operators, i.e., matrices).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 35 / 113

Page 135: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum channels

Quantum channels model evolutions of quantum systems.

We make similar requirements:

A quantum channel N is a linear map acting on the space of(density) matrices:

N (pρ+ (1− p)σ) = pN (ρ) + (1− p)N (σ),

where p ∈ [0, 1] and ρ, σ ∈ D(H).

We demand that a quantum channel should take quantum states toquantum states.

This means that it should be trace (probability) preserving:

Tr{N (X )} = Tr{X}

for all X ∈ L(H) (linear operators, i.e., matrices).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 35 / 113

Page 136: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum channels

Quantum channels model evolutions of quantum systems.

We make similar requirements:

A quantum channel N is a linear map acting on the space of(density) matrices:

N (pρ+ (1− p)σ) = pN (ρ) + (1− p)N (σ),

where p ∈ [0, 1] and ρ, σ ∈ D(H).

We demand that a quantum channel should take quantum states toquantum states.

This means that it should be trace (probability) preserving:

Tr{N (X )} = Tr{X}

for all X ∈ L(H) (linear operators, i.e., matrices).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 35 / 113

Page 137: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum channels

Quantum channels model evolutions of quantum systems.

We make similar requirements:

A quantum channel N is a linear map acting on the space of(density) matrices:

N (pρ+ (1− p)σ) = pN (ρ) + (1− p)N (σ),

where p ∈ [0, 1] and ρ, σ ∈ D(H).

We demand that a quantum channel should take quantum states toquantum states.

This means that it should be trace (probability) preserving:

Tr{N (X )} = Tr{X}

for all X ∈ L(H) (linear operators, i.e., matrices).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 35 / 113

Page 138: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum channels

Quantum channels model evolutions of quantum systems.

We make similar requirements:

A quantum channel N is a linear map acting on the space of(density) matrices:

N (pρ+ (1− p)σ) = pN (ρ) + (1− p)N (σ),

where p ∈ [0, 1] and ρ, σ ∈ D(H).

We demand that a quantum channel should take quantum states toquantum states.

This means that it should be trace (probability) preserving:

Tr{N (X )} = Tr{X}

for all X ∈ L(H) (linear operators, i.e., matrices).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 35 / 113

Page 139: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum channels

Quantum channels model evolutions of quantum systems.

We make similar requirements:

A quantum channel N is a linear map acting on the space of(density) matrices:

N (pρ+ (1− p)σ) = pN (ρ) + (1− p)N (σ),

where p ∈ [0, 1] and ρ, σ ∈ D(H).

We demand that a quantum channel should take quantum states toquantum states.

This means that it should be trace (probability) preserving:

Tr{N (X )} = Tr{X}

for all X ∈ L(H) (linear operators, i.e., matrices).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 35 / 113

Page 140: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Complete positivity

Other requirement is complete positivity.

We can always expand XRS ∈ L(HR ⊗HS) as

XRS =∑i ,j

|i〉〈j |R ⊗ X i ,jS ,

and then define

(idR ⊗NS)(XRS) =∑i ,j

|i〉〈j |R ⊗NS

(X i ,jS

),

with the interpretation being that “nothing (identity channel)happens on system R while the channel N acts on system S .”

A quantum channel should also be completely positive:

(idR ⊗NS)(XRS) ≥ 0,

where idR denotes the identity channel acting on system R ofarbitrary size and XRS ∈ L(HR ⊗HS) is such that XRS ≥ 0.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 36 / 113

Page 141: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Complete positivity

Other requirement is complete positivity.

We can always expand XRS ∈ L(HR ⊗HS) as

XRS =∑i ,j

|i〉〈j |R ⊗ X i ,jS ,

and then define

(idR ⊗NS)(XRS) =∑i ,j

|i〉〈j |R ⊗NS

(X i ,jS

),

with the interpretation being that “nothing (identity channel)happens on system R while the channel N acts on system S .”

A quantum channel should also be completely positive:

(idR ⊗NS)(XRS) ≥ 0,

where idR denotes the identity channel acting on system R ofarbitrary size and XRS ∈ L(HR ⊗HS) is such that XRS ≥ 0.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 36 / 113

Page 142: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Complete positivity

Other requirement is complete positivity.

We can always expand XRS ∈ L(HR ⊗HS) as

XRS =∑i ,j

|i〉〈j |R ⊗ X i ,jS ,

and then define

(idR ⊗NS)(XRS) =∑i ,j

|i〉〈j |R ⊗NS

(X i ,jS

),

with the interpretation being that “nothing (identity channel)happens on system R while the channel N acts on system S .”

A quantum channel should also be completely positive:

(idR ⊗NS)(XRS) ≥ 0,

where idR denotes the identity channel acting on system R ofarbitrary size and XRS ∈ L(HR ⊗HS) is such that XRS ≥ 0.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 36 / 113

Page 143: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Complete positivity

Other requirement is complete positivity.

We can always expand XRS ∈ L(HR ⊗HS) as

XRS =∑i ,j

|i〉〈j |R ⊗ X i ,jS ,

and then define

(idR ⊗NS)(XRS) =∑i ,j

|i〉〈j |R ⊗NS

(X i ,jS

),

with the interpretation being that “nothing (identity channel)happens on system R while the channel N acts on system S .”

A quantum channel should also be completely positive:

(idR ⊗NS)(XRS) ≥ 0,

where idR denotes the identity channel acting on system R ofarbitrary size and XRS ∈ L(HR ⊗HS) is such that XRS ≥ 0.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 36 / 113

Page 144: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum channels: completely positive, trace-preserving

A map N satisfying the requirements of linearity, trace preservation,and complete positivity takes all density matrices to density matricesand is called a quantum channel.

To check whether a given map is completely positive, it suffices tocheck whether

(idR ⊗NS)(|Φ〉〈Φ|RS) ≥ 0,

where

|Φ〉RS =1√d

∑i

|i〉R ⊗ |i〉S

and d = dim(HR) = dim(HS).

Interpretation: the state resulting from a channel acting on one shareof a maximally entangled state completely characterizes the channel.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 37 / 113

Page 145: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum channels: completely positive, trace-preserving

A map N satisfying the requirements of linearity, trace preservation,and complete positivity takes all density matrices to density matricesand is called a quantum channel.

To check whether a given map is completely positive, it suffices tocheck whether

(idR ⊗NS)(|Φ〉〈Φ|RS) ≥ 0,

where

|Φ〉RS =1√d

∑i

|i〉R ⊗ |i〉S

and d = dim(HR) = dim(HS).

Interpretation: the state resulting from a channel acting on one shareof a maximally entangled state completely characterizes the channel.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 37 / 113

Page 146: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum channels: completely positive, trace-preserving

A map N satisfying the requirements of linearity, trace preservation,and complete positivity takes all density matrices to density matricesand is called a quantum channel.

To check whether a given map is completely positive, it suffices tocheck whether

(idR ⊗NS)(|Φ〉〈Φ|RS) ≥ 0,

where

|Φ〉RS =1√d

∑i

|i〉R ⊗ |i〉S

and d = dim(HR) = dim(HS).

Interpretation: the state resulting from a channel acting on one shareof a maximally entangled state completely characterizes the channel.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 37 / 113

Page 147: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum channels: completely positive, trace-preserving

A map N satisfying the requirements of linearity, trace preservation,and complete positivity takes all density matrices to density matricesand is called a quantum channel.

To check whether a given map is completely positive, it suffices tocheck whether

(idR ⊗NS)(|Φ〉〈Φ|RS) ≥ 0,

where

|Φ〉RS =1√d

∑i

|i〉R ⊗ |i〉S

and d = dim(HR) = dim(HS).

Interpretation: the state resulting from a channel acting on one shareof a maximally entangled state completely characterizes the channel.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 37 / 113

Page 148: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Choi-Kraus representation theorem

Structure theorem for quantum channels

Every quantum channel N can be written in the following form:

N (X ) =∑i

KiXK†i , (1)

where {Ki} is a set of Kraus operators, with the property that∑i

K †i Ki = I . (2)

The form given in (1) corresponds to complete positivity and the conditionin (2) to trace (probability) preservation. This decomposition is notunique, but one can find a minimal decomposition by taking a spectraldecomposition of (idR ⊗NS)(|Φ〉〈Φ|RS).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 38 / 113

Page 149: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Examples of quantum channels

Quantum bit-flip channel for p ∈ [0, 1]:

ρ→ (1− p)ρ+ pXρX .

Quantum depolarizing channel for p ∈ [0, 1]:

ρ→ (1− p)ρ+ pπ,

where π ≡ I/d (maximally mixed state).

Quantum erasure channel for p ∈ [0, 1]:

ρ→ (1− p)ρ+ p|e〉〈e|,

where 〈e|ρ|e〉 = 0 for all inputs ρ.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 39 / 113

Page 150: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Examples of quantum channels

Quantum bit-flip channel for p ∈ [0, 1]:

ρ→ (1− p)ρ+ pXρX .

Quantum depolarizing channel for p ∈ [0, 1]:

ρ→ (1− p)ρ+ pπ,

where π ≡ I/d (maximally mixed state).

Quantum erasure channel for p ∈ [0, 1]:

ρ→ (1− p)ρ+ p|e〉〈e|,

where 〈e|ρ|e〉 = 0 for all inputs ρ.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 39 / 113

Page 151: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Examples of quantum channels

Quantum bit-flip channel for p ∈ [0, 1]:

ρ→ (1− p)ρ+ pXρX .

Quantum depolarizing channel for p ∈ [0, 1]:

ρ→ (1− p)ρ+ pπ,

where π ≡ I/d (maximally mixed state).

Quantum erasure channel for p ∈ [0, 1]:

ρ→ (1− p)ρ+ p|e〉〈e|,

where 〈e|ρ|e〉 = 0 for all inputs ρ.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 39 / 113

Page 152: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Examples of quantum channels

Quantum bit-flip channel for p ∈ [0, 1]:

ρ→ (1− p)ρ+ pXρX .

Quantum depolarizing channel for p ∈ [0, 1]:

ρ→ (1− p)ρ+ pπ,

where π ≡ I/d (maximally mixed state).

Quantum erasure channel for p ∈ [0, 1]:

ρ→ (1− p)ρ+ p|e〉〈e|,

where 〈e|ρ|e〉 = 0 for all inputs ρ.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 39 / 113

Page 153: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Unitary channels

If a channel has one Kraus operator (call it U), then it satisfiesU†U = I and is thus a unitary matrix.1

Unitary channels are ideal, reversible channels.

Instruction sequences for quantum algorithms (to be run on quantumcomputers) are composed of ideal, unitary channels.

So if a quantum channel has more than one Kraus operator (in aminimal decomposition), then it is non-unitary and irreversible.

1It could also be part of a unitary matrix, in which case it is called an “isometry.”Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 40 / 113

Page 154: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Unitary channels

If a channel has one Kraus operator (call it U), then it satisfiesU†U = I and is thus a unitary matrix.1

Unitary channels are ideal, reversible channels.

Instruction sequences for quantum algorithms (to be run on quantumcomputers) are composed of ideal, unitary channels.

So if a quantum channel has more than one Kraus operator (in aminimal decomposition), then it is non-unitary and irreversible.

1It could also be part of a unitary matrix, in which case it is called an “isometry.”Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 40 / 113

Page 155: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Unitary channels

If a channel has one Kraus operator (call it U), then it satisfiesU†U = I and is thus a unitary matrix.1

Unitary channels are ideal, reversible channels.

Instruction sequences for quantum algorithms (to be run on quantumcomputers) are composed of ideal, unitary channels.

So if a quantum channel has more than one Kraus operator (in aminimal decomposition), then it is non-unitary and irreversible.

1It could also be part of a unitary matrix, in which case it is called an “isometry.”Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 40 / 113

Page 156: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Unitary channels

If a channel has one Kraus operator (call it U), then it satisfiesU†U = I and is thus a unitary matrix.1

Unitary channels are ideal, reversible channels.

Instruction sequences for quantum algorithms (to be run on quantumcomputers) are composed of ideal, unitary channels.

So if a quantum channel has more than one Kraus operator (in aminimal decomposition), then it is non-unitary and irreversible.

1It could also be part of a unitary matrix, in which case it is called an “isometry.”Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 40 / 113

Page 157: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Unitary channels

If a channel has one Kraus operator (call it U), then it satisfiesU†U = I and is thus a unitary matrix.1

Unitary channels are ideal, reversible channels.

Instruction sequences for quantum algorithms (to be run on quantumcomputers) are composed of ideal, unitary channels.

So if a quantum channel has more than one Kraus operator (in aminimal decomposition), then it is non-unitary and irreversible.

1It could also be part of a unitary matrix, in which case it is called an “isometry.”Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 40 / 113

Page 158: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Preparation channels

Preparation channels take classical systems as input and producequantum systems as output.

A preparation channel P has the following form:

P(ρ) =∑x

〈x |ρ|x〉σx ,

where {|x〉} is an orthonormal basis and {σx} is a set of states.

Inputting the classical state |x〉〈x | leads to quantum output σx , i.e.,it is just the map

x → σx ,

where x is a classical letter. Sometimes called “cq” channel, short for“classical-to-quantum” channel.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 41 / 113

Page 159: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Preparation channels

Preparation channels take classical systems as input and producequantum systems as output.

A preparation channel P has the following form:

P(ρ) =∑x

〈x |ρ|x〉σx ,

where {|x〉} is an orthonormal basis and {σx} is a set of states.

Inputting the classical state |x〉〈x | leads to quantum output σx , i.e.,it is just the map

x → σx ,

where x is a classical letter. Sometimes called “cq” channel, short for“classical-to-quantum” channel.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 41 / 113

Page 160: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Preparation channels

Preparation channels take classical systems as input and producequantum systems as output.

A preparation channel P has the following form:

P(ρ) =∑x

〈x |ρ|x〉σx ,

where {|x〉} is an orthonormal basis and {σx} is a set of states.

Inputting the classical state |x〉〈x | leads to quantum output σx , i.e.,it is just the map

x → σx ,

where x is a classical letter. Sometimes called “cq” channel, short for“classical-to-quantum” channel.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 41 / 113

Page 161: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Preparation channels

Preparation channels take classical systems as input and producequantum systems as output.

A preparation channel P has the following form:

P(ρ) =∑x

〈x |ρ|x〉σx ,

where {|x〉} is an orthonormal basis and {σx} is a set of states.

Inputting the classical state |x〉〈x | leads to quantum output σx , i.e.,it is just the map

x → σx ,

where x is a classical letter. Sometimes called “cq” channel, short for“classical-to-quantum” channel.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 41 / 113

Page 162: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Measurement channels

Measurement channels take quantum systems as input and produceclassical systems as output.

A measurement channel M has the following form:

M(ρ) =∑x

Tr{Mxρ}|x〉〈x |,

where Mx ≥ 0 for all x and∑

x Mx = I .

Can also interpret a measurement channel as returning the classicalvalue x with probability Tr{Mxρ}.

We depict them as

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 42 / 113

Page 163: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Measurement channels

Measurement channels take quantum systems as input and produceclassical systems as output.

A measurement channel M has the following form:

M(ρ) =∑x

Tr{Mxρ}|x〉〈x |,

where Mx ≥ 0 for all x and∑

x Mx = I .

Can also interpret a measurement channel as returning the classicalvalue x with probability Tr{Mxρ}.

We depict them as

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 42 / 113

Page 164: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Measurement channels

Measurement channels take quantum systems as input and produceclassical systems as output.

A measurement channel M has the following form:

M(ρ) =∑x

Tr{Mxρ}|x〉〈x |,

where Mx ≥ 0 for all x and∑

x Mx = I .

Can also interpret a measurement channel as returning the classicalvalue x with probability Tr{Mxρ}.

We depict them as

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 42 / 113

Page 165: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Measurement channels

Measurement channels take quantum systems as input and produceclassical systems as output.

A measurement channel M has the following form:

M(ρ) =∑x

Tr{Mxρ}|x〉〈x |,

where Mx ≥ 0 for all x and∑

x Mx = I .

Can also interpret a measurement channel as returning the classicalvalue x with probability Tr{Mxρ}.

We depict them as

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 42 / 113

Page 166: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Measurement channels

Measurement channels take quantum systems as input and produceclassical systems as output.

A measurement channel M has the following form:

M(ρ) =∑x

Tr{Mxρ}|x〉〈x |,

where Mx ≥ 0 for all x and∑

x Mx = I .

Can also interpret a measurement channel as returning the classicalvalue x with probability Tr{Mxρ}.

We depict them as

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 42 / 113

Page 167: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

“Measuring an operator”

Let G be a Hermitian operator with spectral decomposition

G =∑x

µxΠx ,

where µx are real eigenvalues and Πx are projections ontocorresponding eigensubspaces.

We say that an experimenter “measures an operator G” byperforming the following measurement channel:

ρ→∑x

Tr{Πxρ}|x〉〈x |,

where {|x〉} is an orthonormal basis.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 43 / 113

Page 168: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

“Measuring an operator”

Let G be a Hermitian operator with spectral decomposition

G =∑x

µxΠx ,

where µx are real eigenvalues and Πx are projections ontocorresponding eigensubspaces.

We say that an experimenter “measures an operator G” byperforming the following measurement channel:

ρ→∑x

Tr{Πxρ}|x〉〈x |,

where {|x〉} is an orthonormal basis.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 43 / 113

Page 169: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

“Measuring an operator”

Let G be a Hermitian operator with spectral decomposition

G =∑x

µxΠx ,

where µx are real eigenvalues and Πx are projections ontocorresponding eigensubspaces.

We say that an experimenter “measures an operator G” byperforming the following measurement channel:

ρ→∑x

Tr{Πxρ}|x〉〈x |,

where {|x〉} is an orthonormal basis.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 43 / 113

Page 170: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement-breaking channels

An entanglement-breaking channel N is defined such that for everyinput state ρRS , the output

(idR ⊗NS)(ρRS)

is a separable state.

To determine whether a given channel is entanglement-breaking, itsuffices to check whether the following state is separable:

(idR ⊗NS)(|Φ〉〈Φ|RS).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 44 / 113

Page 171: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement-breaking channels

An entanglement-breaking channel N is defined such that for everyinput state ρRS , the output

(idR ⊗NS)(ρRS)

is a separable state.

To determine whether a given channel is entanglement-breaking, itsuffices to check whether the following state is separable:

(idR ⊗NS)(|Φ〉〈Φ|RS).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 44 / 113

Page 172: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement-breaking channels

An entanglement-breaking channel N is defined such that for everyinput state ρRS , the output

(idR ⊗NS)(ρRS)

is a separable state.

To determine whether a given channel is entanglement-breaking, itsuffices to check whether the following state is separable:

(idR ⊗NS)(|Φ〉〈Φ|RS).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 44 / 113

Page 173: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement-breaking channels

Every entanglement-breaking (EB) channel N can be written as acomposition of a measurement M followed by a preparation P:

N = P ◦M.

Thus, internally, every EB channel transforms a quantum system to aclassical one and then back: q → c → q. In this sense, such channelsare one step up from classical channels and inherit some properties ofclassical channels.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 45 / 113

Page 174: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement-breaking channels

Every entanglement-breaking (EB) channel N can be written as acomposition of a measurement M followed by a preparation P:

N = P ◦M.

Thus, internally, every EB channel transforms a quantum system to aclassical one and then back: q → c → q. In this sense, such channelsare one step up from classical channels and inherit some properties ofclassical channels.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 45 / 113

Page 175: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement-breaking channels

Every entanglement-breaking (EB) channel N can be written as acomposition of a measurement M followed by a preparation P:

N = P ◦M.

Thus, internally, every EB channel transforms a quantum system to aclassical one and then back: q → c → q. In this sense, such channelsare one step up from classical channels and inherit some properties ofclassical channels.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 45 / 113

Page 176: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Purifications of quantum channels

Recall that we can purify quantum states and understand noise asarising due to entanglement with an inaccessible reference system.

We can also purify quantum channels and understand a noisy processas arising from a unitary interaction with an inaccessible environment.

Stinespring’s theorem

For every quantum channel NA→B , there exists a pure state |0〉〈0|E and aunitary matrix UAE→BE ′ , acting on input systems A and E and producingoutput systems B and E ′, such that

NA→B(ρA) = TrE ′{UAE→BE ′(ρA ⊗ |0〉〈0|E )(UAE→BE ′)†}.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 46 / 113

Page 177: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Purifications of quantum channels

Recall that we can purify quantum states and understand noise asarising due to entanglement with an inaccessible reference system.

We can also purify quantum channels and understand a noisy processas arising from a unitary interaction with an inaccessible environment.

Stinespring’s theorem

For every quantum channel NA→B , there exists a pure state |0〉〈0|E and aunitary matrix UAE→BE ′ , acting on input systems A and E and producingoutput systems B and E ′, such that

NA→B(ρA) = TrE ′{UAE→BE ′(ρA ⊗ |0〉〈0|E )(UAE→BE ′)†}.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 46 / 113

Page 178: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Purifications of quantum channels

Recall that we can purify quantum states and understand noise asarising due to entanglement with an inaccessible reference system.

We can also purify quantum channels and understand a noisy processas arising from a unitary interaction with an inaccessible environment.

Stinespring’s theorem

For every quantum channel NA→B , there exists a pure state |0〉〈0|E and aunitary matrix UAE→BE ′ , acting on input systems A and E and producingoutput systems B and E ′, such that

NA→B(ρA) = TrE ′{UAE→BE ′(ρA ⊗ |0〉〈0|E )(UAE→BE ′)†}.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 46 / 113

Page 179: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Purifications of quantum channels

Recall that we can purify quantum states and understand noise asarising due to entanglement with an inaccessible reference system.

We can also purify quantum channels and understand a noisy processas arising from a unitary interaction with an inaccessible environment.

Stinespring’s theorem

For every quantum channel NA→B , there exists a pure state |0〉〈0|E and aunitary matrix UAE→BE ′ , acting on input systems A and E and producingoutput systems B and E ′, such that

NA→B(ρA) = TrE ′{UAE→BE ′(ρA ⊗ |0〉〈0|E )(UAE→BE ′)†}.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 46 / 113

Page 180: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Construction of a unitary extension

Standard construction of a unitary extension of a quantum channel:Given Kraus operators {Ki} for N such that N (ρ) =

∑i KiρK

†i , take

V =∑i

Ki ⊗ |i〉E ′〈0|E .

V †V = I , so we can fill in other columns such that matrix is unitary(call the result U).

Then

U(ρA ⊗ |0〉〈0|E )U† =∑i ,j

KiρK†j ⊗ |i〉〈j |E ′ ,

and TrE ′{U(ρA ⊗ |0〉〈0|E )U†} = TrE ′

∑i ,j

KiρK†j ⊗ |i〉〈j |E ′

=∑i

KiρK†i = N (ρ).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 47 / 113

Page 181: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Construction of a unitary extension

Standard construction of a unitary extension of a quantum channel:Given Kraus operators {Ki} for N such that N (ρ) =

∑i KiρK

†i , take

V =∑i

Ki ⊗ |i〉E ′〈0|E .

V †V = I , so we can fill in other columns such that matrix is unitary(call the result U).

Then

U(ρA ⊗ |0〉〈0|E )U† =∑i ,j

KiρK†j ⊗ |i〉〈j |E ′ ,

and TrE ′{U(ρA ⊗ |0〉〈0|E )U†} = TrE ′

∑i ,j

KiρK†j ⊗ |i〉〈j |E ′

=∑i

KiρK†i = N (ρ).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 47 / 113

Page 182: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Construction of a unitary extension

Standard construction of a unitary extension of a quantum channel:Given Kraus operators {Ki} for N such that N (ρ) =

∑i KiρK

†i , take

V =∑i

Ki ⊗ |i〉E ′〈0|E .

V †V = I , so we can fill in other columns such that matrix is unitary(call the result U).

Then

U(ρA ⊗ |0〉〈0|E )U† =∑i ,j

KiρK†j ⊗ |i〉〈j |E ′ ,

and TrE ′{U(ρA ⊗ |0〉〈0|E )U†} = TrE ′

∑i ,j

KiρK†j ⊗ |i〉〈j |E ′

=∑i

KiρK†i = N (ρ).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 47 / 113

Page 183: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Construction of a unitary extension

Standard construction of a unitary extension of a quantum channel:Given Kraus operators {Ki} for N such that N (ρ) =

∑i KiρK

†i , take

V =∑i

Ki ⊗ |i〉E ′〈0|E .

V †V = I , so we can fill in other columns such that matrix is unitary(call the result U).

Then

U(ρA ⊗ |0〉〈0|E )U† =∑i ,j

KiρK†j ⊗ |i〉〈j |E ′ ,

and TrE ′{U(ρA ⊗ |0〉〈0|E )U†} = TrE ′

∑i ,j

KiρK†j ⊗ |i〉〈j |E ′

=∑i

KiρK†i = N (ρ).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 47 / 113

Page 184: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Summary of quantum states and channels

Every quantum state is a positive, semi-definite matrix with traceequal to one.

Quantum states of multiple systems can be separable or entangled.

Quantum states can be purified (this notion does not exist in classicalinformation theory).

Quantum channels are completely positive, trace-preserving maps.

Preparation channels take classical systems to quantum systems, andmeasurement channels take quantum systems to classical systems.

Quantum channels can also be purified (i.e., every quantum channelcan be realized by a unitary interaction with an environment, followedby partial trace). This notion also does not exist in classicalinformation theory.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 48 / 113

Page 185: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Summary of quantum states and channels

Every quantum state is a positive, semi-definite matrix with traceequal to one.

Quantum states of multiple systems can be separable or entangled.

Quantum states can be purified (this notion does not exist in classicalinformation theory).

Quantum channels are completely positive, trace-preserving maps.

Preparation channels take classical systems to quantum systems, andmeasurement channels take quantum systems to classical systems.

Quantum channels can also be purified (i.e., every quantum channelcan be realized by a unitary interaction with an environment, followedby partial trace). This notion also does not exist in classicalinformation theory.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 48 / 113

Page 186: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Summary of quantum states and channels

Every quantum state is a positive, semi-definite matrix with traceequal to one.

Quantum states of multiple systems can be separable or entangled.

Quantum states can be purified (this notion does not exist in classicalinformation theory).

Quantum channels are completely positive, trace-preserving maps.

Preparation channels take classical systems to quantum systems, andmeasurement channels take quantum systems to classical systems.

Quantum channels can also be purified (i.e., every quantum channelcan be realized by a unitary interaction with an environment, followedby partial trace). This notion also does not exist in classicalinformation theory.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 48 / 113

Page 187: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Summary of quantum states and channels

Every quantum state is a positive, semi-definite matrix with traceequal to one.

Quantum states of multiple systems can be separable or entangled.

Quantum states can be purified (this notion does not exist in classicalinformation theory).

Quantum channels are completely positive, trace-preserving maps.

Preparation channels take classical systems to quantum systems, andmeasurement channels take quantum systems to classical systems.

Quantum channels can also be purified (i.e., every quantum channelcan be realized by a unitary interaction with an environment, followedby partial trace). This notion also does not exist in classicalinformation theory.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 48 / 113

Page 188: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Summary of quantum states and channels

Every quantum state is a positive, semi-definite matrix with traceequal to one.

Quantum states of multiple systems can be separable or entangled.

Quantum states can be purified (this notion does not exist in classicalinformation theory).

Quantum channels are completely positive, trace-preserving maps.

Preparation channels take classical systems to quantum systems, andmeasurement channels take quantum systems to classical systems.

Quantum channels can also be purified (i.e., every quantum channelcan be realized by a unitary interaction with an environment, followedby partial trace). This notion also does not exist in classicalinformation theory.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 48 / 113

Page 189: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Summary of quantum states and channels

Every quantum state is a positive, semi-definite matrix with traceequal to one.

Quantum states of multiple systems can be separable or entangled.

Quantum states can be purified (this notion does not exist in classicalinformation theory).

Quantum channels are completely positive, trace-preserving maps.

Preparation channels take classical systems to quantum systems, andmeasurement channels take quantum systems to classical systems.

Quantum channels can also be purified (i.e., every quantum channelcan be realized by a unitary interaction with an environment, followedby partial trace). This notion also does not exist in classicalinformation theory.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 48 / 113

Page 190: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Summary of quantum states and channels

Every quantum state is a positive, semi-definite matrix with traceequal to one.

Quantum states of multiple systems can be separable or entangled.

Quantum states can be purified (this notion does not exist in classicalinformation theory).

Quantum channels are completely positive, trace-preserving maps.

Preparation channels take classical systems to quantum systems, andmeasurement channels take quantum systems to classical systems.

Quantum channels can also be purified (i.e., every quantum channelcan be realized by a unitary interaction with an environment, followedby partial trace). This notion also does not exist in classicalinformation theory.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 48 / 113

Page 191: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Fundamental protocols

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 49 / 113

Page 192: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bell experiment / CHSH game

How is quantum information different from classical information?

One way to answer this question is to devise operational tasks forwhich a quantum strategy outperforms a classical one.

The most famous is the Bell experiment / CHSH game.2

The game involves two spatially separated parties (the players Aliceand Bob) and a referee.

2A “loop-hole free” implementation of this experiment was conducted in 2015 (seearXiv:1508.05949).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 50 / 113

Page 193: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bell experiment / CHSH game

How is quantum information different from classical information?

One way to answer this question is to devise operational tasks forwhich a quantum strategy outperforms a classical one.

The most famous is the Bell experiment / CHSH game.2

The game involves two spatially separated parties (the players Aliceand Bob) and a referee.

2A “loop-hole free” implementation of this experiment was conducted in 2015 (seearXiv:1508.05949).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 50 / 113

Page 194: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bell experiment / CHSH game

How is quantum information different from classical information?

One way to answer this question is to devise operational tasks forwhich a quantum strategy outperforms a classical one.

The most famous is the Bell experiment / CHSH game.2

The game involves two spatially separated parties (the players Aliceand Bob) and a referee.

2A “loop-hole free” implementation of this experiment was conducted in 2015 (seearXiv:1508.05949).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 50 / 113

Page 195: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bell experiment / CHSH game

How is quantum information different from classical information?

One way to answer this question is to devise operational tasks forwhich a quantum strategy outperforms a classical one.

The most famous is the Bell experiment / CHSH game.2

The game involves two spatially separated parties (the players Aliceand Bob) and a referee.

2A “loop-hole free” implementation of this experiment was conducted in 2015 (seearXiv:1508.05949).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 50 / 113

Page 196: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bell experiment / CHSH game

How is quantum information different from classical information?

One way to answer this question is to devise operational tasks forwhich a quantum strategy outperforms a classical one.

The most famous is the Bell experiment / CHSH game.2

The game involves two spatially separated parties (the players Aliceand Bob) and a referee.

2A “loop-hole free” implementation of this experiment was conducted in 2015 (seearXiv:1508.05949).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 50 / 113

Page 197: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bell experiment / CHSH game

Game begins with referee randomly picking bits x and y .

Referee sends x and y to Alice and Bob, respectively.

Alice replies with a bit a and Bob with a bit b.

They win if and only if a⊕ b = x ∧ y .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 51 / 113

Page 198: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bell experiment / CHSH game

Game begins with referee randomly picking bits x and y .

Referee sends x and y to Alice and Bob, respectively.

Alice replies with a bit a and Bob with a bit b.

They win if and only if a⊕ b = x ∧ y .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 51 / 113

Page 199: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bell experiment / CHSH game

Game begins with referee randomly picking bits x and y .

Referee sends x and y to Alice and Bob, respectively.

Alice replies with a bit a and Bob with a bit b.

They win if and only if a⊕ b = x ∧ y .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 51 / 113

Page 200: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bell experiment / CHSH game

Game begins with referee randomly picking bits x and y .

Referee sends x and y to Alice and Bob, respectively.

Alice replies with a bit a and Bob with a bit b.

They win if and only if a⊕ b = x ∧ y .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 51 / 113

Page 201: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bell experiment / CHSH game

Game begins with referee randomly picking bits x and y .

Referee sends x and y to Alice and Bob, respectively.

Alice replies with a bit a and Bob with a bit b.

They win if and only if a⊕ b = x ∧ y .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 51 / 113

Page 202: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Classical strategies

The most general classical strategy allows for Alice and Bob topossess shared randomness before the game begins.

However, can show that shared randomness does not help them win.

Thus, to compute the winning probability with classical strategies, itsuffices to consider deterministic classical strategies.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 52 / 113

Page 203: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Classical strategies

The most general classical strategy allows for Alice and Bob topossess shared randomness before the game begins.

However, can show that shared randomness does not help them win.

Thus, to compute the winning probability with classical strategies, itsuffices to consider deterministic classical strategies.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 52 / 113

Page 204: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Classical strategies

The most general classical strategy allows for Alice and Bob topossess shared randomness before the game begins.

However, can show that shared randomness does not help them win.

Thus, to compute the winning probability with classical strategies, itsuffices to consider deterministic classical strategies.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 52 / 113

Page 205: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Classical strategies

The most general classical strategy allows for Alice and Bob topossess shared randomness before the game begins.

However, can show that shared randomness does not help them win.

Thus, to compute the winning probability with classical strategies, itsuffices to consider deterministic classical strategies.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 52 / 113

Page 206: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Deterministic classical strategies

General deterministic strategy: x → ax for Alice and y → by for Bob.

The following table presents the winning conditions for the fourdifferent values of x and y using this deterministic strategy:

x y x ∧ y = ax ⊕ by

0 0 0 = a0 ⊕ b0

0 1 0 = a0 ⊕ b1

1 0 0 = a1 ⊕ b0

1 1 1 = a1 ⊕ b1

They cannot always win. (If they could, there would be acontradiction, because adding up 3rd column gives 1 while adding up4th column gives 0.)

The best they can do is to win only 3/4 = 0.75 of the time!

Strategy achieving this: Alice and Bob each always report back zero.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 53 / 113

Page 207: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Deterministic classical strategies

General deterministic strategy: x → ax for Alice and y → by for Bob.

The following table presents the winning conditions for the fourdifferent values of x and y using this deterministic strategy:

x y x ∧ y = ax ⊕ by

0 0 0 = a0 ⊕ b0

0 1 0 = a0 ⊕ b1

1 0 0 = a1 ⊕ b0

1 1 1 = a1 ⊕ b1

They cannot always win. (If they could, there would be acontradiction, because adding up 3rd column gives 1 while adding up4th column gives 0.)

The best they can do is to win only 3/4 = 0.75 of the time!

Strategy achieving this: Alice and Bob each always report back zero.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 53 / 113

Page 208: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Deterministic classical strategies

General deterministic strategy: x → ax for Alice and y → by for Bob.

The following table presents the winning conditions for the fourdifferent values of x and y using this deterministic strategy:

x y x ∧ y = ax ⊕ by

0 0 0 = a0 ⊕ b0

0 1 0 = a0 ⊕ b1

1 0 0 = a1 ⊕ b0

1 1 1 = a1 ⊕ b1

They cannot always win. (If they could, there would be acontradiction, because adding up 3rd column gives 1 while adding up4th column gives 0.)

The best they can do is to win only 3/4 = 0.75 of the time!

Strategy achieving this: Alice and Bob each always report back zero.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 53 / 113

Page 209: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Deterministic classical strategies

General deterministic strategy: x → ax for Alice and y → by for Bob.

The following table presents the winning conditions for the fourdifferent values of x and y using this deterministic strategy:

x y x ∧ y = ax ⊕ by

0 0 0 = a0 ⊕ b0

0 1 0 = a0 ⊕ b1

1 0 0 = a1 ⊕ b0

1 1 1 = a1 ⊕ b1

They cannot always win. (If they could, there would be acontradiction, because adding up 3rd column gives 1 while adding up4th column gives 0.)

The best they can do is to win only 3/4 = 0.75 of the time!

Strategy achieving this: Alice and Bob each always report back zero.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 53 / 113

Page 210: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Deterministic classical strategies

General deterministic strategy: x → ax for Alice and y → by for Bob.

The following table presents the winning conditions for the fourdifferent values of x and y using this deterministic strategy:

x y x ∧ y = ax ⊕ by

0 0 0 = a0 ⊕ b0

0 1 0 = a0 ⊕ b1

1 0 0 = a1 ⊕ b0

1 1 1 = a1 ⊕ b1

They cannot always win. (If they could, there would be acontradiction, because adding up 3rd column gives 1 while adding up4th column gives 0.)

The best they can do is to win only 3/4 = 0.75 of the time!

Strategy achieving this: Alice and Bob each always report back zero.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 53 / 113

Page 211: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Deterministic classical strategies

General deterministic strategy: x → ax for Alice and y → by for Bob.

The following table presents the winning conditions for the fourdifferent values of x and y using this deterministic strategy:

x y x ∧ y = ax ⊕ by

0 0 0 = a0 ⊕ b0

0 1 0 = a0 ⊕ b1

1 0 0 = a1 ⊕ b0

1 1 1 = a1 ⊕ b1

They cannot always win. (If they could, there would be acontradiction, because adding up 3rd column gives 1 while adding up4th column gives 0.)

The best they can do is to win only 3/4 = 0.75 of the time!

Strategy achieving this: Alice and Bob each always report back zero.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 53 / 113

Page 212: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum strategy

Allow Alice and Bob to share two qubits in the state |Φ〉〈Φ|AB beforethe game starts.

If Alice receives x = 0, then she performs a measurement of Z . If shereceives x = 1, then she performs a measurement of X . In each case,she reports the outcome as a.

If Bob receives y = 0, then he performs a measurement of(X + Z )/

√2. If he receives y = 1, then he performs a measurement

of (Z − X )/√

2. In each case, he reports the outcome as b.

This quantum strategy has a winning probability ofcos2(π/8) ≈ 0.85 > 0.75 and thus represents a significant separationbetween classical and quantum information theory.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 54 / 113

Page 213: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum strategy

Allow Alice and Bob to share two qubits in the state |Φ〉〈Φ|AB beforethe game starts.

If Alice receives x = 0, then she performs a measurement of Z . If shereceives x = 1, then she performs a measurement of X . In each case,she reports the outcome as a.

If Bob receives y = 0, then he performs a measurement of(X + Z )/

√2. If he receives y = 1, then he performs a measurement

of (Z − X )/√

2. In each case, he reports the outcome as b.

This quantum strategy has a winning probability ofcos2(π/8) ≈ 0.85 > 0.75 and thus represents a significant separationbetween classical and quantum information theory.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 54 / 113

Page 214: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum strategy

Allow Alice and Bob to share two qubits in the state |Φ〉〈Φ|AB beforethe game starts.

If Alice receives x = 0, then she performs a measurement of Z . If shereceives x = 1, then she performs a measurement of X . In each case,she reports the outcome as a.

If Bob receives y = 0, then he performs a measurement of(X + Z )/

√2. If he receives y = 1, then he performs a measurement

of (Z − X )/√

2. In each case, he reports the outcome as b.

This quantum strategy has a winning probability ofcos2(π/8) ≈ 0.85 > 0.75 and thus represents a significant separationbetween classical and quantum information theory.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 54 / 113

Page 215: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum strategy

Allow Alice and Bob to share two qubits in the state |Φ〉〈Φ|AB beforethe game starts.

If Alice receives x = 0, then she performs a measurement of Z . If shereceives x = 1, then she performs a measurement of X . In each case,she reports the outcome as a.

If Bob receives y = 0, then he performs a measurement of(X + Z )/

√2. If he receives y = 1, then he performs a measurement

of (Z − X )/√

2. In each case, he reports the outcome as b.

This quantum strategy has a winning probability ofcos2(π/8) ≈ 0.85 > 0.75 and thus represents a significant separationbetween classical and quantum information theory.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 54 / 113

Page 216: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum strategy

Allow Alice and Bob to share two qubits in the state |Φ〉〈Φ|AB beforethe game starts.

If Alice receives x = 0, then she performs a measurement of Z . If shereceives x = 1, then she performs a measurement of X . In each case,she reports the outcome as a.

If Bob receives y = 0, then he performs a measurement of(X + Z )/

√2. If he receives y = 1, then he performs a measurement

of (Z − X )/√

2. In each case, he reports the outcome as b.

This quantum strategy has a winning probability ofcos2(π/8) ≈ 0.85 > 0.75 and thus represents a significant separationbetween classical and quantum information theory.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 54 / 113

Page 217: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Loophole-free Bell test...

Picture of loophole-free Bell test at TU Delft(Image taken from http://hansonlab.tudelft.nl/loophole-free-bell-test/)

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 55 / 113

Page 218: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Three fundamental protocols

The three important noiseless protocols in quantum informationtheory are entanglement distribution, super-dense coding, andquantum teleportation.

They are the building blocks for later core quantum communicationprotocols, in which we replace a noiseless resource with a noisy one.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 56 / 113

Page 219: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Three fundamental protocols

The three important noiseless protocols in quantum informationtheory are entanglement distribution, super-dense coding, andquantum teleportation.

They are the building blocks for later core quantum communicationprotocols, in which we replace a noiseless resource with a noisy one.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 56 / 113

Page 220: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Three fundamental protocols

The three important noiseless protocols in quantum informationtheory are entanglement distribution, super-dense coding, andquantum teleportation.

They are the building blocks for later core quantum communicationprotocols, in which we replace a noiseless resource with a noisy one.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 56 / 113

Page 221: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Communication resources

Resources

Let [c → c] denote a noiseless classical bit channel from Alice(sender) to Bob (receiver), which performs the following mapping ona qubit density matrix:

ρ =

[ρ00 ρ01

ρ10 ρ11

]→ 1

2ρ+

1

2ZρZ =

[ρ00 00 ρ11

].

Let [q → q] denote a noiseless quantum bit channel from Alice toBob, which perfectly preserves a qubit density matrix.

Let [qq] denote a noiseless ebit shared between Alice and Bob, whichis a maximally entangled state |Φ〉〈Φ|AB .

Entanglement distribution, super-dense coding, and teleportation arenon-trivial protocols for combining these resources.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 57 / 113

Page 222: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Communication resources

Resources

Let [c → c] denote a noiseless classical bit channel from Alice(sender) to Bob (receiver), which performs the following mapping ona qubit density matrix:

ρ =

[ρ00 ρ01

ρ10 ρ11

]→ 1

2ρ+

1

2ZρZ =

[ρ00 00 ρ11

].

Let [q → q] denote a noiseless quantum bit channel from Alice toBob, which perfectly preserves a qubit density matrix.

Let [qq] denote a noiseless ebit shared between Alice and Bob, whichis a maximally entangled state |Φ〉〈Φ|AB .

Entanglement distribution, super-dense coding, and teleportation arenon-trivial protocols for combining these resources.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 57 / 113

Page 223: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Communication resources

Resources

Let [c → c] denote a noiseless classical bit channel from Alice(sender) to Bob (receiver), which performs the following mapping ona qubit density matrix:

ρ =

[ρ00 ρ01

ρ10 ρ11

]→ 1

2ρ+

1

2ZρZ =

[ρ00 00 ρ11

].

Let [q → q] denote a noiseless quantum bit channel from Alice toBob, which perfectly preserves a qubit density matrix.

Let [qq] denote a noiseless ebit shared between Alice and Bob, whichis a maximally entangled state |Φ〉〈Φ|AB .

Entanglement distribution, super-dense coding, and teleportation arenon-trivial protocols for combining these resources.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 57 / 113

Page 224: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Communication resources

Resources

Let [c → c] denote a noiseless classical bit channel from Alice(sender) to Bob (receiver), which performs the following mapping ona qubit density matrix:

ρ =

[ρ00 ρ01

ρ10 ρ11

]→ 1

2ρ+

1

2ZρZ =

[ρ00 00 ρ11

].

Let [q → q] denote a noiseless quantum bit channel from Alice toBob, which perfectly preserves a qubit density matrix.

Let [qq] denote a noiseless ebit shared between Alice and Bob, whichis a maximally entangled state |Φ〉〈Φ|AB .

Entanglement distribution, super-dense coding, and teleportation arenon-trivial protocols for combining these resources.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 57 / 113

Page 225: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Communication resources

Resources

Let [c → c] denote a noiseless classical bit channel from Alice(sender) to Bob (receiver), which performs the following mapping ona qubit density matrix:

ρ =

[ρ00 ρ01

ρ10 ρ11

]→ 1

2ρ+

1

2ZρZ =

[ρ00 00 ρ11

].

Let [q → q] denote a noiseless quantum bit channel from Alice toBob, which perfectly preserves a qubit density matrix.

Let [qq] denote a noiseless ebit shared between Alice and Bob, whichis a maximally entangled state |Φ〉〈Φ|AB .

Entanglement distribution, super-dense coding, and teleportation arenon-trivial protocols for combining these resources.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 57 / 113

Page 226: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Communication resources

Resources

Let [c → c] denote a noiseless classical bit channel from Alice(sender) to Bob (receiver), which performs the following mapping ona qubit density matrix:

ρ =

[ρ00 ρ01

ρ10 ρ11

]→ 1

2ρ+

1

2ZρZ =

[ρ00 00 ρ11

].

Let [q → q] denote a noiseless quantum bit channel from Alice toBob, which perfectly preserves a qubit density matrix.

Let [qq] denote a noiseless ebit shared between Alice and Bob, whichis a maximally entangled state |Φ〉〈Φ|AB .

Entanglement distribution, super-dense coding, and teleportation arenon-trivial protocols for combining these resources.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 57 / 113

Page 227: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Preparing a maximally entangled state of two qubits

How to prepare a maximally entangled state?

Alice begins by preparing two qubits in the tensor-product state:

|0〉〈0|A ⊗ |0〉〈0|A′ .

Let H = 1√2

[1 11 −1

], which is a unitary matrix. Alice performs the

unitary channel H(·)H† on her system A, leading to the global state

HA|0〉〈0|AH†A ⊗ |0〉〈0|A′ .

Alice performs CNOT = |0〉〈0|A ⊗ IA′ + |1〉〈1|A ⊗ XA′ . This is aunitary called controlled-NOT, because it flips the second bit if andonly if the first bit is one (these actions are done in superposition).

After doing this, the state on AA′ becomes |Φ〉〈Φ|AA′ .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 58 / 113

Page 228: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Preparing a maximally entangled state of two qubits

How to prepare a maximally entangled state?

Alice begins by preparing two qubits in the tensor-product state:

|0〉〈0|A ⊗ |0〉〈0|A′ .

Let H = 1√2

[1 11 −1

], which is a unitary matrix. Alice performs the

unitary channel H(·)H† on her system A, leading to the global state

HA|0〉〈0|AH†A ⊗ |0〉〈0|A′ .

Alice performs CNOT = |0〉〈0|A ⊗ IA′ + |1〉〈1|A ⊗ XA′ . This is aunitary called controlled-NOT, because it flips the second bit if andonly if the first bit is one (these actions are done in superposition).

After doing this, the state on AA′ becomes |Φ〉〈Φ|AA′ .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 58 / 113

Page 229: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Preparing a maximally entangled state of two qubits

How to prepare a maximally entangled state?

Alice begins by preparing two qubits in the tensor-product state:

|0〉〈0|A ⊗ |0〉〈0|A′ .

Let H = 1√2

[1 11 −1

], which is a unitary matrix. Alice performs the

unitary channel H(·)H† on her system A, leading to the global state

HA|0〉〈0|AH†A ⊗ |0〉〈0|A′ .

Alice performs CNOT = |0〉〈0|A ⊗ IA′ + |1〉〈1|A ⊗ XA′ . This is aunitary called controlled-NOT, because it flips the second bit if andonly if the first bit is one (these actions are done in superposition).

After doing this, the state on AA′ becomes |Φ〉〈Φ|AA′ .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 58 / 113

Page 230: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Preparing a maximally entangled state of two qubits

How to prepare a maximally entangled state?

Alice begins by preparing two qubits in the tensor-product state:

|0〉〈0|A ⊗ |0〉〈0|A′ .

Let H = 1√2

[1 11 −1

], which is a unitary matrix. Alice performs the

unitary channel H(·)H† on her system A, leading to the global state

HA|0〉〈0|AH†A ⊗ |0〉〈0|A′ .

Alice performs CNOT = |0〉〈0|A ⊗ IA′ + |1〉〈1|A ⊗ XA′ . This is aunitary called controlled-NOT, because it flips the second bit if andonly if the first bit is one (these actions are done in superposition).

After doing this, the state on AA′ becomes |Φ〉〈Φ|AA′ .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 58 / 113

Page 231: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Preparing a maximally entangled state of two qubits

How to prepare a maximally entangled state?

Alice begins by preparing two qubits in the tensor-product state:

|0〉〈0|A ⊗ |0〉〈0|A′ .

Let H = 1√2

[1 11 −1

], which is a unitary matrix. Alice performs the

unitary channel H(·)H† on her system A, leading to the global state

HA|0〉〈0|AH†A ⊗ |0〉〈0|A′ .

Alice performs CNOT = |0〉〈0|A ⊗ IA′ + |1〉〈1|A ⊗ XA′ . This is aunitary called controlled-NOT, because it flips the second bit if andonly if the first bit is one (these actions are done in superposition).

After doing this, the state on AA′ becomes |Φ〉〈Φ|AA′ .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 58 / 113

Page 232: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Preparing a maximally entangled state of two qubits

How to prepare a maximally entangled state?

Alice begins by preparing two qubits in the tensor-product state:

|0〉〈0|A ⊗ |0〉〈0|A′ .

Let H = 1√2

[1 11 −1

], which is a unitary matrix. Alice performs the

unitary channel H(·)H† on her system A, leading to the global state

HA|0〉〈0|AH†A ⊗ |0〉〈0|A′ .

Alice performs CNOT = |0〉〈0|A ⊗ IA′ + |1〉〈1|A ⊗ XA′ . This is aunitary called controlled-NOT, because it flips the second bit if andonly if the first bit is one (these actions are done in superposition).

After doing this, the state on AA′ becomes |Φ〉〈Φ|AA′ .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 58 / 113

Page 233: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement distribution

A’

B

id

|0〉

|0〉

A

A’→B

H

Alice performs local operations (the Hadamard and CNOT) andconsumes one use of a noiseless qubit channel to generate onenoiseless ebit |Φ〉〈Φ|AB shared with Bob.

Resource inequality: [q → q] ≥ [qq].

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 59 / 113

Page 234: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement distribution

A’

B

id

|0〉

|0〉

A

A’→B

H

Alice performs local operations (the Hadamard and CNOT) andconsumes one use of a noiseless qubit channel to generate onenoiseless ebit |Φ〉〈Φ|AB shared with Bob.

Resource inequality: [q → q] ≥ [qq].

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 59 / 113

Page 235: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement distribution

A’

B

id

|0〉

|0〉

A

A’→B

H

Alice performs local operations (the Hadamard and CNOT) andconsumes one use of a noiseless qubit channel to generate onenoiseless ebit |Φ〉〈Φ|AB shared with Bob.

Resource inequality: [q → q] ≥ [qq].

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 59 / 113

Page 236: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bell states

Consider that, for a 2× 2 matrix MB ,

〈Φ|AB IA ⊗MB |Φ〉AB =1

2Tr{MB}.

I has trace 2 and Pauli matrices X , Y , and Z are traceless.Multiplying any two of them of them gives another Pauli matrix.

These facts imply that the following set forms an orthonormal basis:

{|Φ〉AB , XA|Φ〉AB , ZA|Φ〉AB , ZAXA|Φ〉AB}.

So the following states are perfectly distinguishable:

{|Φ〉〈Φ|AB , XA|Φ〉〈Φ|ABXA, ZA|Φ〉〈Φ|ABZA, ZAXA|Φ〉〈Φ|ABXAZA}.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 60 / 113

Page 237: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bell states

Consider that, for a 2× 2 matrix MB ,

〈Φ|AB IA ⊗MB |Φ〉AB =1

2Tr{MB}.

I has trace 2 and Pauli matrices X , Y , and Z are traceless.Multiplying any two of them of them gives another Pauli matrix.

These facts imply that the following set forms an orthonormal basis:

{|Φ〉AB , XA|Φ〉AB , ZA|Φ〉AB , ZAXA|Φ〉AB}.

So the following states are perfectly distinguishable:

{|Φ〉〈Φ|AB , XA|Φ〉〈Φ|ABXA, ZA|Φ〉〈Φ|ABZA, ZAXA|Φ〉〈Φ|ABXAZA}.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 60 / 113

Page 238: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bell states

Consider that, for a 2× 2 matrix MB ,

〈Φ|AB IA ⊗MB |Φ〉AB =1

2Tr{MB}.

I has trace 2 and Pauli matrices X , Y , and Z are traceless.Multiplying any two of them of them gives another Pauli matrix.

These facts imply that the following set forms an orthonormal basis:

{|Φ〉AB , XA|Φ〉AB , ZA|Φ〉AB , ZAXA|Φ〉AB}.

So the following states are perfectly distinguishable:

{|Φ〉〈Φ|AB , XA|Φ〉〈Φ|ABXA, ZA|Φ〉〈Φ|ABZA, ZAXA|Φ〉〈Φ|ABXAZA}.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 60 / 113

Page 239: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bell states

Consider that, for a 2× 2 matrix MB ,

〈Φ|AB IA ⊗MB |Φ〉AB =1

2Tr{MB}.

I has trace 2 and Pauli matrices X , Y , and Z are traceless.Multiplying any two of them of them gives another Pauli matrix.

These facts imply that the following set forms an orthonormal basis:

{|Φ〉AB , XA|Φ〉AB , ZA|Φ〉AB , ZAXA|Φ〉AB}.

So the following states are perfectly distinguishable:

{|Φ〉〈Φ|AB , XA|Φ〉〈Φ|ABXA, ZA|Φ〉〈Φ|ABZA, ZAXA|Φ〉〈Φ|ABXAZA}.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 60 / 113

Page 240: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bell states

Consider that, for a 2× 2 matrix MB ,

〈Φ|AB IA ⊗MB |Φ〉AB =1

2Tr{MB}.

I has trace 2 and Pauli matrices X , Y , and Z are traceless.Multiplying any two of them of them gives another Pauli matrix.

These facts imply that the following set forms an orthonormal basis:

{|Φ〉AB , XA|Φ〉AB , ZA|Φ〉AB , ZAXA|Φ〉AB}.

So the following states are perfectly distinguishable:

{|Φ〉〈Φ|AB , XA|Φ〉〈Φ|ABXA, ZA|Φ〉〈Φ|ABZA, ZAXA|Φ〉〈Φ|ABXAZA}.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 60 / 113

Page 241: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bell measurement

The measurement channel that distinguishes these states is called theBell measurement:

ρAB →Tr{|Φ〉〈Φ|ABρAB}|00〉〈00|+ Tr{XA|Φ〉〈Φ|ABXAρAB}|01〉〈01|+ Tr{ZA|Φ〉〈Φ|ABZAρAB}|10〉〈10|+ Tr{ZAXA|Φ〉〈Φ|ABXAZAρAB}|11〉〈11|.

This measurement can be implemented on a quantum computer byperforming controlled-NOT from A to B, Hadamard on A, and thenmeasuring A and B in the standard basis.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 61 / 113

Page 242: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bell measurement

The measurement channel that distinguishes these states is called theBell measurement:

ρAB →Tr{|Φ〉〈Φ|ABρAB}|00〉〈00|+ Tr{XA|Φ〉〈Φ|ABXAρAB}|01〉〈01|+ Tr{ZA|Φ〉〈Φ|ABZAρAB}|10〉〈10|+ Tr{ZAXA|Φ〉〈Φ|ABXAZAρAB}|11〉〈11|.

This measurement can be implemented on a quantum computer byperforming controlled-NOT from A to B, Hadamard on A, and thenmeasuring A and B in the standard basis.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 61 / 113

Page 243: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bell measurement

The measurement channel that distinguishes these states is called theBell measurement:

ρAB →Tr{|Φ〉〈Φ|ABρAB}|00〉〈00|+ Tr{XA|Φ〉〈Φ|ABXAρAB}|01〉〈01|+ Tr{ZA|Φ〉〈Φ|ABZAρAB}|10〉〈10|+ Tr{ZAXA|Φ〉〈Φ|ABXAZAρAB}|11〉〈11|.

This measurement can be implemented on a quantum computer byperforming controlled-NOT from A to B, Hadamard on A, and thenmeasuring A and B in the standard basis.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 61 / 113

Page 244: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Super-dense coding

X Z

Bell Measurement

Conditional Operations

QubitChannel

x1x2

x1x2

|Ф 〉+AB

Alice and Bob share an ebit. Alice would like to transmit two classicalbits x1x2 to Bob. She performs a Pauli rotation conditioned on x1x2

and sends her share of the ebit over a noiseless qubit channel. Bobthen performs a Bell measurement to get x1x2.

Resource inequality: [q → q] + [qq] ≥ 2[c → c].

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 62 / 113

Page 245: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Super-dense coding

X Z

Bell Measurement

Conditional Operations

QubitChannel

x1x2

x1x2

|Ф 〉+AB

Alice and Bob share an ebit. Alice would like to transmit two classicalbits x1x2 to Bob. She performs a Pauli rotation conditioned on x1x2

and sends her share of the ebit over a noiseless qubit channel. Bobthen performs a Bell measurement to get x1x2.

Resource inequality: [q → q] + [qq] ≥ 2[c → c].

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 62 / 113

Page 246: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Super-dense coding

X Z

Bell Measurement

Conditional Operations

QubitChannel

x1x2

x1x2

|Ф 〉+AB

Alice and Bob share an ebit. Alice would like to transmit two classicalbits x1x2 to Bob. She performs a Pauli rotation conditioned on x1x2

and sends her share of the ebit over a noiseless qubit channel. Bobthen performs a Bell measurement to get x1x2.

Resource inequality: [q → q] + [qq] ≥ 2[c → c].

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 62 / 113

Page 247: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Algebraic trick for quantum teleportation

Let |ψ〉〈ψ| be the state of a qubit where |ψ〉 = α|0〉+ β|1〉.By using the algebra of the tensor product, can show that

|ψ〉A′ |Φ〉AB ∝ |Φ〉A′A |ψ〉B + XA |Φ〉A′A XB |ψ〉B+ ZA |Φ〉A′A ZB |ψ〉B + ZAXA |Φ〉A′A XBZB |ψ〉B .

Performing the Bell measurement channel on systems AA′ leads tothe following state:

1

4

[|00〉〈00|AA′ ⊗ |ψ〉〈ψ|B + |01〉〈01|AA′ ⊗ XB |ψ〉〈ψ|BXB

+ |10〉〈10|AA′ ⊗ ZB |ψ〉〈ψ|BZB

+ |11〉〈11|AA′ ⊗ XBZB |ψ〉〈ψ|BZBXB

].

Alice then sends the two classical bits in AA′ to Bob. Bob can thenundo the Pauli rotations and recover the state |ψ〉〈ψ|B .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 63 / 113

Page 248: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Algebraic trick for quantum teleportation

Let |ψ〉〈ψ| be the state of a qubit where |ψ〉 = α|0〉+ β|1〉.

By using the algebra of the tensor product, can show that

|ψ〉A′ |Φ〉AB ∝ |Φ〉A′A |ψ〉B + XA |Φ〉A′A XB |ψ〉B+ ZA |Φ〉A′A ZB |ψ〉B + ZAXA |Φ〉A′A XBZB |ψ〉B .

Performing the Bell measurement channel on systems AA′ leads tothe following state:

1

4

[|00〉〈00|AA′ ⊗ |ψ〉〈ψ|B + |01〉〈01|AA′ ⊗ XB |ψ〉〈ψ|BXB

+ |10〉〈10|AA′ ⊗ ZB |ψ〉〈ψ|BZB

+ |11〉〈11|AA′ ⊗ XBZB |ψ〉〈ψ|BZBXB

].

Alice then sends the two classical bits in AA′ to Bob. Bob can thenundo the Pauli rotations and recover the state |ψ〉〈ψ|B .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 63 / 113

Page 249: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Algebraic trick for quantum teleportation

Let |ψ〉〈ψ| be the state of a qubit where |ψ〉 = α|0〉+ β|1〉.By using the algebra of the tensor product, can show that

|ψ〉A′ |Φ〉AB ∝ |Φ〉A′A |ψ〉B + XA |Φ〉A′A XB |ψ〉B+ ZA |Φ〉A′A ZB |ψ〉B + ZAXA |Φ〉A′A XBZB |ψ〉B .

Performing the Bell measurement channel on systems AA′ leads tothe following state:

1

4

[|00〉〈00|AA′ ⊗ |ψ〉〈ψ|B + |01〉〈01|AA′ ⊗ XB |ψ〉〈ψ|BXB

+ |10〉〈10|AA′ ⊗ ZB |ψ〉〈ψ|BZB

+ |11〉〈11|AA′ ⊗ XBZB |ψ〉〈ψ|BZBXB

].

Alice then sends the two classical bits in AA′ to Bob. Bob can thenundo the Pauli rotations and recover the state |ψ〉〈ψ|B .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 63 / 113

Page 250: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Algebraic trick for quantum teleportation

Let |ψ〉〈ψ| be the state of a qubit where |ψ〉 = α|0〉+ β|1〉.By using the algebra of the tensor product, can show that

|ψ〉A′ |Φ〉AB ∝ |Φ〉A′A |ψ〉B + XA |Φ〉A′A XB |ψ〉B+ ZA |Φ〉A′A ZB |ψ〉B + ZAXA |Φ〉A′A XBZB |ψ〉B .

Performing the Bell measurement channel on systems AA′ leads tothe following state:

1

4

[|00〉〈00|AA′ ⊗ |ψ〉〈ψ|B + |01〉〈01|AA′ ⊗ XB |ψ〉〈ψ|BXB

+ |10〉〈10|AA′ ⊗ ZB |ψ〉〈ψ|BZB

+ |11〉〈11|AA′ ⊗ XBZB |ψ〉〈ψ|BZBXB

].

Alice then sends the two classical bits in AA′ to Bob. Bob can thenundo the Pauli rotations and recover the state |ψ〉〈ψ|B .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 63 / 113

Page 251: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Algebraic trick for quantum teleportation

Let |ψ〉〈ψ| be the state of a qubit where |ψ〉 = α|0〉+ β|1〉.By using the algebra of the tensor product, can show that

|ψ〉A′ |Φ〉AB ∝ |Φ〉A′A |ψ〉B + XA |Φ〉A′A XB |ψ〉B+ ZA |Φ〉A′A ZB |ψ〉B + ZAXA |Φ〉A′A XBZB |ψ〉B .

Performing the Bell measurement channel on systems AA′ leads tothe following state:

1

4

[|00〉〈00|AA′ ⊗ |ψ〉〈ψ|B + |01〉〈01|AA′ ⊗ XB |ψ〉〈ψ|BXB

+ |10〉〈10|AA′ ⊗ ZB |ψ〉〈ψ|BZB

+ |11〉〈11|AA′ ⊗ XBZB |ψ〉〈ψ|BZBXB

].

Alice then sends the two classical bits in AA′ to Bob. Bob can thenundo the Pauli rotations and recover the state |ψ〉〈ψ|B .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 63 / 113

Page 252: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Teleportation

X Z

Bell Measurement

Conditional Operations

Two ClassicalChannels

|Ф 〉+AB

A’|ψ〉

B|ψ〉

Alice would like to transmit an arbitrary quantum state |ψ〉〈ψ|A′ toBob. Alice and Bob share an ebit before the protocol begins. Alicecan “teleport” her quantum state to Bob by consuming theentanglement and two uses of a noiseless classical bit channel.

Resource inequality: 2[c → c] + [qq] ≥ [q → q].

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 64 / 113

Page 253: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Teleportation

X Z

Bell Measurement

Conditional Operations

Two ClassicalChannels

|Ф 〉+AB

A’|ψ〉

B|ψ〉

Alice would like to transmit an arbitrary quantum state |ψ〉〈ψ|A′ toBob. Alice and Bob share an ebit before the protocol begins. Alicecan “teleport” her quantum state to Bob by consuming theentanglement and two uses of a noiseless classical bit channel.

Resource inequality: 2[c → c] + [qq] ≥ [q → q].

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 64 / 113

Page 254: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Teleportation

X Z

Bell Measurement

Conditional Operations

Two ClassicalChannels

|Ф 〉+AB

A’|ψ〉

B|ψ〉

Alice would like to transmit an arbitrary quantum state |ψ〉〈ψ|A′ toBob. Alice and Bob share an ebit before the protocol begins. Alicecan “teleport” her quantum state to Bob by consuming theentanglement and two uses of a noiseless classical bit channel.

Resource inequality: 2[c → c] + [qq] ≥ [q → q].

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 64 / 113

Page 255: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Teleportation between Canary Islands...

Teleportation between two Canary Islands 143 km apart. Green lasers wereused only for stabilization—invisible infrared photons were teleported(Image taken from http://www.ing.iac.es/PR/press/quantum.html)

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 65 / 113

Page 256: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Distance measures

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 66 / 113

Page 257: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Function of a diagonalizable matrix

If an n × n matrix D is diagonal with entries d1, . . . , dn, then for afunction f , we define

f (D) =

g(d1) 0 · · · 0

0 g(d2)...

.... . . 0

0 · · · 0 g(dn)

where g(x) = f (x) if x 6= 0 and g(x) = 0 otherwise.

If a matrix A is diagonalizable as A = KDK−1, then for a function f ,we define

f (A) = Kf (D)K−1.

Evaluating the function only on the support of the matrix allows forfunctions such as f (x) = x−1 and f (x) = log x .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 67 / 113

Page 258: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Function of a diagonalizable matrix

If an n × n matrix D is diagonal with entries d1, . . . , dn, then for afunction f , we define

f (D) =

g(d1) 0 · · · 0

0 g(d2)...

.... . . 0

0 · · · 0 g(dn)

where g(x) = f (x) if x 6= 0 and g(x) = 0 otherwise.

If a matrix A is diagonalizable as A = KDK−1, then for a function f ,we define

f (A) = Kf (D)K−1.

Evaluating the function only on the support of the matrix allows forfunctions such as f (x) = x−1 and f (x) = log x .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 67 / 113

Page 259: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Function of a diagonalizable matrix

If an n × n matrix D is diagonal with entries d1, . . . , dn, then for afunction f , we define

f (D) =

g(d1) 0 · · · 0

0 g(d2)...

.... . . 0

0 · · · 0 g(dn)

where g(x) = f (x) if x 6= 0 and g(x) = 0 otherwise.

If a matrix A is diagonalizable as A = KDK−1, then for a function f ,we define

f (A) = Kf (D)K−1.

Evaluating the function only on the support of the matrix allows forfunctions such as f (x) = x−1 and f (x) = log x .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 67 / 113

Page 260: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Function of a diagonalizable matrix

If an n × n matrix D is diagonal with entries d1, . . . , dn, then for afunction f , we define

f (D) =

g(d1) 0 · · · 0

0 g(d2)...

.... . . 0

0 · · · 0 g(dn)

where g(x) = f (x) if x 6= 0 and g(x) = 0 otherwise.

If a matrix A is diagonalizable as A = KDK−1, then for a function f ,we define

f (A) = Kf (D)K−1.

Evaluating the function only on the support of the matrix allows forfunctions such as f (x) = x−1 and f (x) = log x .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 67 / 113

Page 261: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Trace distance

Define the trace norm of a matrix X by ‖X‖1 ≡ Tr{√X †X}.

Trace norm induces trace distance between two matrices X and Y :

‖X − Y ‖1.

For two density matrices ρ and σ, the following bounds hold

0 ≤ ‖ρ− σ‖1 ≤ 2.

LHS saturated iff ρ = σ and RHS iff ρ is orthogonal to σ.

For commuting ρ and σ, trace distance reduces to variational distancebetween probability distributions along diagonals.

Has an operational meaning as the bias of the optimal successprobability in a hypothesis test to distinguish ρ from σ.

Does not increase under the action of a quantum channel:

‖ρ− σ‖1 ≥ ‖N (ρ)−N (σ)‖1.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 68 / 113

Page 262: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Trace distance

Define the trace norm of a matrix X by ‖X‖1 ≡ Tr{√X †X}.

Trace norm induces trace distance between two matrices X and Y :

‖X − Y ‖1.

For two density matrices ρ and σ, the following bounds hold

0 ≤ ‖ρ− σ‖1 ≤ 2.

LHS saturated iff ρ = σ and RHS iff ρ is orthogonal to σ.

For commuting ρ and σ, trace distance reduces to variational distancebetween probability distributions along diagonals.

Has an operational meaning as the bias of the optimal successprobability in a hypothesis test to distinguish ρ from σ.

Does not increase under the action of a quantum channel:

‖ρ− σ‖1 ≥ ‖N (ρ)−N (σ)‖1.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 68 / 113

Page 263: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Trace distance

Define the trace norm of a matrix X by ‖X‖1 ≡ Tr{√X †X}.

Trace norm induces trace distance between two matrices X and Y :

‖X − Y ‖1.

For two density matrices ρ and σ, the following bounds hold

0 ≤ ‖ρ− σ‖1 ≤ 2.

LHS saturated iff ρ = σ and RHS iff ρ is orthogonal to σ.

For commuting ρ and σ, trace distance reduces to variational distancebetween probability distributions along diagonals.

Has an operational meaning as the bias of the optimal successprobability in a hypothesis test to distinguish ρ from σ.

Does not increase under the action of a quantum channel:

‖ρ− σ‖1 ≥ ‖N (ρ)−N (σ)‖1.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 68 / 113

Page 264: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Trace distance

Define the trace norm of a matrix X by ‖X‖1 ≡ Tr{√X †X}.

Trace norm induces trace distance between two matrices X and Y :

‖X − Y ‖1.

For two density matrices ρ and σ, the following bounds hold

0 ≤ ‖ρ− σ‖1 ≤ 2.

LHS saturated iff ρ = σ and RHS iff ρ is orthogonal to σ.

For commuting ρ and σ, trace distance reduces to variational distancebetween probability distributions along diagonals.

Has an operational meaning as the bias of the optimal successprobability in a hypothesis test to distinguish ρ from σ.

Does not increase under the action of a quantum channel:

‖ρ− σ‖1 ≥ ‖N (ρ)−N (σ)‖1.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 68 / 113

Page 265: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Trace distance

Define the trace norm of a matrix X by ‖X‖1 ≡ Tr{√X †X}.

Trace norm induces trace distance between two matrices X and Y :

‖X − Y ‖1.

For two density matrices ρ and σ, the following bounds hold

0 ≤ ‖ρ− σ‖1 ≤ 2.

LHS saturated iff ρ = σ and RHS iff ρ is orthogonal to σ.

For commuting ρ and σ, trace distance reduces to variational distancebetween probability distributions along diagonals.

Has an operational meaning as the bias of the optimal successprobability in a hypothesis test to distinguish ρ from σ.

Does not increase under the action of a quantum channel:

‖ρ− σ‖1 ≥ ‖N (ρ)−N (σ)‖1.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 68 / 113

Page 266: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Trace distance

Define the trace norm of a matrix X by ‖X‖1 ≡ Tr{√X †X}.

Trace norm induces trace distance between two matrices X and Y :

‖X − Y ‖1.

For two density matrices ρ and σ, the following bounds hold

0 ≤ ‖ρ− σ‖1 ≤ 2.

LHS saturated iff ρ = σ and RHS iff ρ is orthogonal to σ.

For commuting ρ and σ, trace distance reduces to variational distancebetween probability distributions along diagonals.

Has an operational meaning as the bias of the optimal successprobability in a hypothesis test to distinguish ρ from σ.

Does not increase under the action of a quantum channel:

‖ρ− σ‖1 ≥ ‖N (ρ)−N (σ)‖1.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 68 / 113

Page 267: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Trace distance

Define the trace norm of a matrix X by ‖X‖1 ≡ Tr{√X †X}.

Trace norm induces trace distance between two matrices X and Y :

‖X − Y ‖1.

For two density matrices ρ and σ, the following bounds hold

0 ≤ ‖ρ− σ‖1 ≤ 2.

LHS saturated iff ρ = σ and RHS iff ρ is orthogonal to σ.

For commuting ρ and σ, trace distance reduces to variational distancebetween probability distributions along diagonals.

Has an operational meaning as the bias of the optimal successprobability in a hypothesis test to distinguish ρ from σ.

Does not increase under the action of a quantum channel:

‖ρ− σ‖1 ≥ ‖N (ρ)−N (σ)‖1.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 68 / 113

Page 268: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Fidelity

Fidelity F (ρ, σ) between density matrices ρ and σ is

F (ρ, σ) ≡ ‖√ρ√σ‖2

1.

For pure states |ψ〉〈ψ| and |φ〉〈φ|, reduces to squared overlap:

F (|ψ〉〈ψ|, |φ〉〈φ|) = |〈ψ|φ〉|2.

For commuting ρ and σ, reduces to Bhattacharyya coefficient ofprobability distributions along diagonals.

For density matrices ρ and σ, the following bounds hold:

0 ≤ F (ρ, σ) ≤ 1.

LHS saturated iff ρ and σ are orthogonal and RHS iff ρ = σ.

Fidelity does not decrease under the action of a quantum channel N :

F (ρ, σ) ≤ F (N (ρ),N (σ)).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 69 / 113

Page 269: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Fidelity

Fidelity F (ρ, σ) between density matrices ρ and σ is

F (ρ, σ) ≡ ‖√ρ√σ‖2

1.

For pure states |ψ〉〈ψ| and |φ〉〈φ|, reduces to squared overlap:

F (|ψ〉〈ψ|, |φ〉〈φ|) = |〈ψ|φ〉|2.

For commuting ρ and σ, reduces to Bhattacharyya coefficient ofprobability distributions along diagonals.

For density matrices ρ and σ, the following bounds hold:

0 ≤ F (ρ, σ) ≤ 1.

LHS saturated iff ρ and σ are orthogonal and RHS iff ρ = σ.

Fidelity does not decrease under the action of a quantum channel N :

F (ρ, σ) ≤ F (N (ρ),N (σ)).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 69 / 113

Page 270: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Fidelity

Fidelity F (ρ, σ) between density matrices ρ and σ is

F (ρ, σ) ≡ ‖√ρ√σ‖2

1.

For pure states |ψ〉〈ψ| and |φ〉〈φ|, reduces to squared overlap:

F (|ψ〉〈ψ|, |φ〉〈φ|) = |〈ψ|φ〉|2.

For commuting ρ and σ, reduces to Bhattacharyya coefficient ofprobability distributions along diagonals.

For density matrices ρ and σ, the following bounds hold:

0 ≤ F (ρ, σ) ≤ 1.

LHS saturated iff ρ and σ are orthogonal and RHS iff ρ = σ.

Fidelity does not decrease under the action of a quantum channel N :

F (ρ, σ) ≤ F (N (ρ),N (σ)).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 69 / 113

Page 271: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Fidelity

Fidelity F (ρ, σ) between density matrices ρ and σ is

F (ρ, σ) ≡ ‖√ρ√σ‖2

1.

For pure states |ψ〉〈ψ| and |φ〉〈φ|, reduces to squared overlap:

F (|ψ〉〈ψ|, |φ〉〈φ|) = |〈ψ|φ〉|2.

For commuting ρ and σ, reduces to Bhattacharyya coefficient ofprobability distributions along diagonals.

For density matrices ρ and σ, the following bounds hold:

0 ≤ F (ρ, σ) ≤ 1.

LHS saturated iff ρ and σ are orthogonal and RHS iff ρ = σ.

Fidelity does not decrease under the action of a quantum channel N :

F (ρ, σ) ≤ F (N (ρ),N (σ)).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 69 / 113

Page 272: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Fidelity

Fidelity F (ρ, σ) between density matrices ρ and σ is

F (ρ, σ) ≡ ‖√ρ√σ‖2

1.

For pure states |ψ〉〈ψ| and |φ〉〈φ|, reduces to squared overlap:

F (|ψ〉〈ψ|, |φ〉〈φ|) = |〈ψ|φ〉|2.

For commuting ρ and σ, reduces to Bhattacharyya coefficient ofprobability distributions along diagonals.

For density matrices ρ and σ, the following bounds hold:

0 ≤ F (ρ, σ) ≤ 1.

LHS saturated iff ρ and σ are orthogonal and RHS iff ρ = σ.

Fidelity does not decrease under the action of a quantum channel N :

F (ρ, σ) ≤ F (N (ρ),N (σ)).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 69 / 113

Page 273: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Fidelity

Fidelity F (ρ, σ) between density matrices ρ and σ is

F (ρ, σ) ≡ ‖√ρ√σ‖2

1.

For pure states |ψ〉〈ψ| and |φ〉〈φ|, reduces to squared overlap:

F (|ψ〉〈ψ|, |φ〉〈φ|) = |〈ψ|φ〉|2.

For commuting ρ and σ, reduces to Bhattacharyya coefficient ofprobability distributions along diagonals.

For density matrices ρ and σ, the following bounds hold:

0 ≤ F (ρ, σ) ≤ 1.

LHS saturated iff ρ and σ are orthogonal and RHS iff ρ = σ.

Fidelity does not decrease under the action of a quantum channel N :

F (ρ, σ) ≤ F (N (ρ),N (σ)).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 69 / 113

Page 274: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Uhlmann’s theorem

Uhlmann’s theorem states that

F (ρS , σS) = maxUR

|〈ψ|RSUR ⊗ IS |φ〉RS |2,

where |ψ〉RS and |φ〉RS purify ρS and σS , respectively.

A core theorem used in quantum Shannon theory, and in other areassuch as quantum complexity theory and quantum error correction.

Since it involves purifications, this theorem has no analog in classicalinformation theory.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 70 / 113

Page 275: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Uhlmann’s theorem

Uhlmann’s theorem states that

F (ρS , σS) = maxUR

|〈ψ|RSUR ⊗ IS |φ〉RS |2,

where |ψ〉RS and |φ〉RS purify ρS and σS , respectively.

A core theorem used in quantum Shannon theory, and in other areassuch as quantum complexity theory and quantum error correction.

Since it involves purifications, this theorem has no analog in classicalinformation theory.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 70 / 113

Page 276: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Uhlmann’s theorem

Uhlmann’s theorem states that

F (ρS , σS) = maxUR

|〈ψ|RSUR ⊗ IS |φ〉RS |2,

where |ψ〉RS and |φ〉RS purify ρS and σS , respectively.

A core theorem used in quantum Shannon theory, and in other areassuch as quantum complexity theory and quantum error correction.

Since it involves purifications, this theorem has no analog in classicalinformation theory.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 70 / 113

Page 277: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Uhlmann’s theorem

Uhlmann’s theorem states that

F (ρS , σS) = maxUR

|〈ψ|RSUR ⊗ IS |φ〉RS |2,

where |ψ〉RS and |φ〉RS purify ρS and σS , respectively.

A core theorem used in quantum Shannon theory, and in other areassuch as quantum complexity theory and quantum error correction.

Since it involves purifications, this theorem has no analog in classicalinformation theory.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 70 / 113

Page 278: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Relations between fidelity and trace distance

Trace distance is useful because it obeys the triangle inequality, andfidelity is useful because we have Uhlmann’s theorem.

The following inequalities relate the two measures, which allows forgoing back and forth between them:

1−√F (ρ, σ) ≤ 1

2‖ρ− σ‖1 ≤

√1− F (ρ, σ).

A distance measure which has both properties (triangle inequality andUhlmann’s theorem) is

√1− F (ρ, σ).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 71 / 113

Page 279: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Relations between fidelity and trace distance

Trace distance is useful because it obeys the triangle inequality, andfidelity is useful because we have Uhlmann’s theorem.

The following inequalities relate the two measures, which allows forgoing back and forth between them:

1−√F (ρ, σ) ≤ 1

2‖ρ− σ‖1 ≤

√1− F (ρ, σ).

A distance measure which has both properties (triangle inequality andUhlmann’s theorem) is

√1− F (ρ, σ).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 71 / 113

Page 280: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Relations between fidelity and trace distance

Trace distance is useful because it obeys the triangle inequality, andfidelity is useful because we have Uhlmann’s theorem.

The following inequalities relate the two measures, which allows forgoing back and forth between them:

1−√F (ρ, σ) ≤ 1

2‖ρ− σ‖1 ≤

√1− F (ρ, σ).

A distance measure which has both properties (triangle inequality andUhlmann’s theorem) is

√1− F (ρ, σ).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 71 / 113

Page 281: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Relations between fidelity and trace distance

Trace distance is useful because it obeys the triangle inequality, andfidelity is useful because we have Uhlmann’s theorem.

The following inequalities relate the two measures, which allows forgoing back and forth between them:

1−√F (ρ, σ) ≤ 1

2‖ρ− σ‖1 ≤

√1− F (ρ, σ).

A distance measure which has both properties (triangle inequality andUhlmann’s theorem) is

√1− F (ρ, σ).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 71 / 113

Page 282: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Information measures

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 72 / 113

Page 283: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entropy and information...

Entropy and information can be discomforting...

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 73 / 113

Page 284: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum relative entropy

One of the most fundamental information measures is the quantumrelative entropy, defined for a state ρ and a positive semi-definitematrix σ as

D(ρ‖σ) ≡ Tr{ρ[log2 ρ− log2 σ]},

when supp(ρ) ⊆ supp(σ) and as +∞ otherwise.

It does not increase under the action of a quantum channel N :

D(ρ‖σ) ≥ D(N (ρ)‖N (σ)).

If Tr{ρ} ≥ Tr{σ}, thenD(ρ‖σ) ≥ 0,

with equality holding iff ρ = σ.

Quantum Pinsker inequality: D(ρ‖σ) ≥ 12 ln 2‖ρ− σ‖

21.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 74 / 113

Page 285: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum relative entropy

One of the most fundamental information measures is the quantumrelative entropy, defined for a state ρ and a positive semi-definitematrix σ as

D(ρ‖σ) ≡ Tr{ρ[log2 ρ− log2 σ]},

when supp(ρ) ⊆ supp(σ) and as +∞ otherwise.

It does not increase under the action of a quantum channel N :

D(ρ‖σ) ≥ D(N (ρ)‖N (σ)).

If Tr{ρ} ≥ Tr{σ}, thenD(ρ‖σ) ≥ 0,

with equality holding iff ρ = σ.

Quantum Pinsker inequality: D(ρ‖σ) ≥ 12 ln 2‖ρ− σ‖

21.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 74 / 113

Page 286: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum relative entropy

One of the most fundamental information measures is the quantumrelative entropy, defined for a state ρ and a positive semi-definitematrix σ as

D(ρ‖σ) ≡ Tr{ρ[log2 ρ− log2 σ]},

when supp(ρ) ⊆ supp(σ) and as +∞ otherwise.

It does not increase under the action of a quantum channel N :

D(ρ‖σ) ≥ D(N (ρ)‖N (σ)).

If Tr{ρ} ≥ Tr{σ}, thenD(ρ‖σ) ≥ 0,

with equality holding iff ρ = σ.

Quantum Pinsker inequality: D(ρ‖σ) ≥ 12 ln 2‖ρ− σ‖

21.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 74 / 113

Page 287: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum relative entropy

One of the most fundamental information measures is the quantumrelative entropy, defined for a state ρ and a positive semi-definitematrix σ as

D(ρ‖σ) ≡ Tr{ρ[log2 ρ− log2 σ]},

when supp(ρ) ⊆ supp(σ) and as +∞ otherwise.

It does not increase under the action of a quantum channel N :

D(ρ‖σ) ≥ D(N (ρ)‖N (σ)).

If Tr{ρ} ≥ Tr{σ}, thenD(ρ‖σ) ≥ 0,

with equality holding iff ρ = σ.

Quantum Pinsker inequality: D(ρ‖σ) ≥ 12 ln 2‖ρ− σ‖

21.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 74 / 113

Page 288: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum relative entropy

One of the most fundamental information measures is the quantumrelative entropy, defined for a state ρ and a positive semi-definitematrix σ as

D(ρ‖σ) ≡ Tr{ρ[log2 ρ− log2 σ]},

when supp(ρ) ⊆ supp(σ) and as +∞ otherwise.

It does not increase under the action of a quantum channel N :

D(ρ‖σ) ≥ D(N (ρ)‖N (σ)).

If Tr{ρ} ≥ Tr{σ}, thenD(ρ‖σ) ≥ 0,

with equality holding iff ρ = σ.

Quantum Pinsker inequality: D(ρ‖σ) ≥ 12 ln 2‖ρ− σ‖

21.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 74 / 113

Page 289: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Children of quantum relative entropy

Relative entropy as “parent” entropy

Many entropies can be written in terms of relative entropy:

H(A)ρ ≡ −D(ρA‖IA) = −Tr{ρA log2 ρA} (entropy)

H(A|B)ρ ≡ −D(ρAB‖IA ⊗ ρB) (conditional entropy)

I (A;B)ρ ≡ D(ρAB‖ρA ⊗ ρB) (mutual information)

I (A〉B)ρ ≡ D(ρAB‖IA ⊗ ρB) (coherent information)

Equalities

H(A|B)ρ = H(AB)ρ − H(B)ρ

I (A〉B)ρ = −H(A|B)ρ

I (A;B)ρ = H(A)ρ + H(B)ρ − H(AB)ρ

I (A;B|C )ρ ≡ H(AC )ρ + H(BC )ρ − H(ABC )ρ − H(C )ρ

I (A;B|C )ρ = H(B|C )ρ − H(B|AC )ρ

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 75 / 113

Page 290: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Children of quantum relative entropy

Relative entropy as “parent” entropy

Many entropies can be written in terms of relative entropy:

H(A)ρ ≡ −D(ρA‖IA) = −Tr{ρA log2 ρA} (entropy)

H(A|B)ρ ≡ −D(ρAB‖IA ⊗ ρB) (conditional entropy)

I (A;B)ρ ≡ D(ρAB‖ρA ⊗ ρB) (mutual information)

I (A〉B)ρ ≡ D(ρAB‖IA ⊗ ρB) (coherent information)

Equalities

H(A|B)ρ = H(AB)ρ − H(B)ρ

I (A〉B)ρ = −H(A|B)ρ

I (A;B)ρ = H(A)ρ + H(B)ρ − H(AB)ρ

I (A;B|C )ρ ≡ H(AC )ρ + H(BC )ρ − H(ABC )ρ − H(C )ρ

I (A;B|C )ρ = H(B|C )ρ − H(B|AC )ρ

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 75 / 113

Page 291: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Children of quantum relative entropy

Relative entropy as “parent” entropy

Many entropies can be written in terms of relative entropy:

H(A)ρ ≡ −D(ρA‖IA) = −Tr{ρA log2 ρA} (entropy)

H(A|B)ρ ≡ −D(ρAB‖IA ⊗ ρB) (conditional entropy)

I (A;B)ρ ≡ D(ρAB‖ρA ⊗ ρB) (mutual information)

I (A〉B)ρ ≡ D(ρAB‖IA ⊗ ρB) (coherent information)

Equalities

H(A|B)ρ = H(AB)ρ − H(B)ρ

I (A〉B)ρ = −H(A|B)ρ

I (A;B)ρ = H(A)ρ + H(B)ρ − H(AB)ρ

I (A;B|C )ρ ≡ H(AC )ρ + H(BC )ρ − H(ABC )ρ − H(C )ρ

I (A;B|C )ρ = H(B|C )ρ − H(B|AC )ρ

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 75 / 113

Page 292: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Children of quantum relative entropy

Relative entropy as “parent” entropy

Many entropies can be written in terms of relative entropy:

H(A)ρ ≡ −D(ρA‖IA) = −Tr{ρA log2 ρA} (entropy)

H(A|B)ρ ≡ −D(ρAB‖IA ⊗ ρB) (conditional entropy)

I (A;B)ρ ≡ D(ρAB‖ρA ⊗ ρB) (mutual information)

I (A〉B)ρ ≡ D(ρAB‖IA ⊗ ρB) (coherent information)

Equalities

H(A|B)ρ = H(AB)ρ − H(B)ρ

I (A〉B)ρ = −H(A|B)ρ

I (A;B)ρ = H(A)ρ + H(B)ρ − H(AB)ρ

I (A;B|C )ρ ≡ H(AC )ρ + H(BC )ρ − H(ABC )ρ − H(C )ρ

I (A;B|C )ρ = H(B|C )ρ − H(B|AC )ρ

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 75 / 113

Page 293: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Children of quantum relative entropy

Relative entropy as “parent” entropy

Many entropies can be written in terms of relative entropy:

H(A)ρ ≡ −D(ρA‖IA) = −Tr{ρA log2 ρA} (entropy)

H(A|B)ρ ≡ −D(ρAB‖IA ⊗ ρB) (conditional entropy)

I (A;B)ρ ≡ D(ρAB‖ρA ⊗ ρB) (mutual information)

I (A〉B)ρ ≡ D(ρAB‖IA ⊗ ρB) (coherent information)

Equalities

H(A|B)ρ = H(AB)ρ − H(B)ρ

I (A〉B)ρ = −H(A|B)ρ

I (A;B)ρ = H(A)ρ + H(B)ρ − H(AB)ρ

I (A;B|C )ρ ≡ H(AC )ρ + H(BC )ρ − H(ABC )ρ − H(C )ρ

I (A;B|C )ρ = H(B|C )ρ − H(B|AC )ρ

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 75 / 113

Page 294: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Children of quantum relative entropy

Relative entropy as “parent” entropy

Many entropies can be written in terms of relative entropy:

H(A)ρ ≡ −D(ρA‖IA) = −Tr{ρA log2 ρA} (entropy)

H(A|B)ρ ≡ −D(ρAB‖IA ⊗ ρB) (conditional entropy)

I (A;B)ρ ≡ D(ρAB‖ρA ⊗ ρB) (mutual information)

I (A〉B)ρ ≡ D(ρAB‖IA ⊗ ρB) (coherent information)

Equalities

H(A|B)ρ = H(AB)ρ − H(B)ρ

I (A〉B)ρ = −H(A|B)ρ

I (A;B)ρ = H(A)ρ + H(B)ρ − H(AB)ρ

I (A;B|C )ρ ≡ H(AC )ρ + H(BC )ρ − H(ABC )ρ − H(C )ρ

I (A;B|C )ρ = H(B|C )ρ − H(B|AC )ρ

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 75 / 113

Page 295: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Children of quantum relative entropy

Relative entropy as “parent” entropy

Many entropies can be written in terms of relative entropy:

H(A)ρ ≡ −D(ρA‖IA) = −Tr{ρA log2 ρA} (entropy)

H(A|B)ρ ≡ −D(ρAB‖IA ⊗ ρB) (conditional entropy)

I (A;B)ρ ≡ D(ρAB‖ρA ⊗ ρB) (mutual information)

I (A〉B)ρ ≡ D(ρAB‖IA ⊗ ρB) (coherent information)

Equalities

H(A|B)ρ = H(AB)ρ − H(B)ρ

I (A〉B)ρ = −H(A|B)ρ

I (A;B)ρ = H(A)ρ + H(B)ρ − H(AB)ρ

I (A;B|C )ρ ≡ H(AC )ρ + H(BC )ρ − H(ABC )ρ − H(C )ρ

I (A;B|C )ρ = H(B|C )ρ − H(B|AC )ρ

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 75 / 113

Page 296: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Children of quantum relative entropy

Relative entropy as “parent” entropy

Many entropies can be written in terms of relative entropy:

H(A)ρ ≡ −D(ρA‖IA) = −Tr{ρA log2 ρA} (entropy)

H(A|B)ρ ≡ −D(ρAB‖IA ⊗ ρB) (conditional entropy)

I (A;B)ρ ≡ D(ρAB‖ρA ⊗ ρB) (mutual information)

I (A〉B)ρ ≡ D(ρAB‖IA ⊗ ρB) (coherent information)

Equalities

H(A|B)ρ = H(AB)ρ − H(B)ρ

I (A〉B)ρ = −H(A|B)ρ

I (A;B)ρ = H(A)ρ + H(B)ρ − H(AB)ρ

I (A;B|C )ρ ≡ H(AC )ρ + H(BC )ρ − H(ABC )ρ − H(C )ρ

I (A;B|C )ρ = H(B|C )ρ − H(B|AC )ρ

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 75 / 113

Page 297: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Children of quantum relative entropy

Relative entropy as “parent” entropy

Many entropies can be written in terms of relative entropy:

H(A)ρ ≡ −D(ρA‖IA) = −Tr{ρA log2 ρA} (entropy)

H(A|B)ρ ≡ −D(ρAB‖IA ⊗ ρB) (conditional entropy)

I (A;B)ρ ≡ D(ρAB‖ρA ⊗ ρB) (mutual information)

I (A〉B)ρ ≡ D(ρAB‖IA ⊗ ρB) (coherent information)

Equalities

H(A|B)ρ = H(AB)ρ − H(B)ρ

I (A〉B)ρ = −H(A|B)ρ

I (A;B)ρ = H(A)ρ + H(B)ρ − H(AB)ρ

I (A;B|C )ρ ≡ H(AC )ρ + H(BC )ρ − H(ABC )ρ − H(C )ρ

I (A;B|C )ρ = H(B|C )ρ − H(B|AC )ρ

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 75 / 113

Page 298: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Children of quantum relative entropy

Relative entropy as “parent” entropy

Many entropies can be written in terms of relative entropy:

H(A)ρ ≡ −D(ρA‖IA) = −Tr{ρA log2 ρA} (entropy)

H(A|B)ρ ≡ −D(ρAB‖IA ⊗ ρB) (conditional entropy)

I (A;B)ρ ≡ D(ρAB‖ρA ⊗ ρB) (mutual information)

I (A〉B)ρ ≡ D(ρAB‖IA ⊗ ρB) (coherent information)

Equalities

H(A|B)ρ = H(AB)ρ − H(B)ρ

I (A〉B)ρ = −H(A|B)ρ

I (A;B)ρ = H(A)ρ + H(B)ρ − H(AB)ρ

I (A;B|C )ρ ≡ H(AC )ρ + H(BC )ρ − H(ABC )ρ − H(C )ρ

I (A;B|C )ρ = H(B|C )ρ − H(B|AC )ρ

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 75 / 113

Page 299: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Children of quantum relative entropy

Relative entropy as “parent” entropy

Many entropies can be written in terms of relative entropy:

H(A)ρ ≡ −D(ρA‖IA) = −Tr{ρA log2 ρA} (entropy)

H(A|B)ρ ≡ −D(ρAB‖IA ⊗ ρB) (conditional entropy)

I (A;B)ρ ≡ D(ρAB‖ρA ⊗ ρB) (mutual information)

I (A〉B)ρ ≡ D(ρAB‖IA ⊗ ρB) (coherent information)

Equalities

H(A|B)ρ = H(AB)ρ − H(B)ρ

I (A〉B)ρ = −H(A|B)ρ

I (A;B)ρ = H(A)ρ + H(B)ρ − H(AB)ρ

I (A;B|C )ρ ≡ H(AC )ρ + H(BC )ρ − H(ABC )ρ − H(C )ρ

I (A;B|C )ρ = H(B|C )ρ − H(B|AC )ρ

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 75 / 113

Page 300: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Children of quantum relative entropy

Relative entropy as “parent” entropy

Many entropies can be written in terms of relative entropy:

H(A)ρ ≡ −D(ρA‖IA) = −Tr{ρA log2 ρA} (entropy)

H(A|B)ρ ≡ −D(ρAB‖IA ⊗ ρB) (conditional entropy)

I (A;B)ρ ≡ D(ρAB‖ρA ⊗ ρB) (mutual information)

I (A〉B)ρ ≡ D(ρAB‖IA ⊗ ρB) (coherent information)

Equalities

H(A|B)ρ = H(AB)ρ − H(B)ρ

I (A〉B)ρ = −H(A|B)ρ

I (A;B)ρ = H(A)ρ + H(B)ρ − H(AB)ρ

I (A;B|C )ρ ≡ H(AC )ρ + H(BC )ρ − H(ABC )ρ − H(C )ρ

I (A;B|C )ρ = H(B|C )ρ − H(B|AC )ρ

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 75 / 113

Page 301: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Evaluating quantum entropy

How do we evaluate the formula for quantum entropy of a state ρA?

Consider spectral decomposition:

ρA =∑x

pX (x)|x〉〈x |A.

Then, with η(x) = −x log2(x),

H(A)ρ = Tr{η(ρA)} = Tr

{∑x

η(pX (x))|x〉〈x |A

}=∑x

η(pX (x)) Tr{|x〉〈x |A} =∑x

η(pX (x)) = H(pX ).

Quantum entropy of ρA is equal to Shannon entropy of eigenvalues.

⇒ Entropy of a pure state is equal to zero.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 76 / 113

Page 302: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Evaluating quantum entropy

How do we evaluate the formula for quantum entropy of a state ρA?

Consider spectral decomposition:

ρA =∑x

pX (x)|x〉〈x |A.

Then, with η(x) = −x log2(x),

H(A)ρ = Tr{η(ρA)} = Tr

{∑x

η(pX (x))|x〉〈x |A

}=∑x

η(pX (x)) Tr{|x〉〈x |A} =∑x

η(pX (x)) = H(pX ).

Quantum entropy of ρA is equal to Shannon entropy of eigenvalues.

⇒ Entropy of a pure state is equal to zero.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 76 / 113

Page 303: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Evaluating quantum entropy

How do we evaluate the formula for quantum entropy of a state ρA?

Consider spectral decomposition:

ρA =∑x

pX (x)|x〉〈x |A.

Then, with η(x) = −x log2(x),

H(A)ρ = Tr{η(ρA)} = Tr

{∑x

η(pX (x))|x〉〈x |A

}=∑x

η(pX (x)) Tr{|x〉〈x |A} =∑x

η(pX (x)) = H(pX ).

Quantum entropy of ρA is equal to Shannon entropy of eigenvalues.

⇒ Entropy of a pure state is equal to zero.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 76 / 113

Page 304: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Evaluating quantum entropy

How do we evaluate the formula for quantum entropy of a state ρA?

Consider spectral decomposition:

ρA =∑x

pX (x)|x〉〈x |A.

Then, with η(x) = −x log2(x),

H(A)ρ = Tr{η(ρA)} = Tr

{∑x

η(pX (x))|x〉〈x |A

}=∑x

η(pX (x)) Tr{|x〉〈x |A} =∑x

η(pX (x)) = H(pX ).

Quantum entropy of ρA is equal to Shannon entropy of eigenvalues.

⇒ Entropy of a pure state is equal to zero.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 76 / 113

Page 305: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Evaluating quantum entropy

How do we evaluate the formula for quantum entropy of a state ρA?

Consider spectral decomposition:

ρA =∑x

pX (x)|x〉〈x |A.

Then, with η(x) = −x log2(x),

H(A)ρ = Tr{η(ρA)} = Tr

{∑x

η(pX (x))|x〉〈x |A

}=∑x

η(pX (x)) Tr{|x〉〈x |A} =∑x

η(pX (x)) = H(pX ).

Quantum entropy of ρA is equal to Shannon entropy of eigenvalues.

⇒ Entropy of a pure state is equal to zero.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 76 / 113

Page 306: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Evaluating quantum entropy

How do we evaluate the formula for quantum entropy of a state ρA?

Consider spectral decomposition:

ρA =∑x

pX (x)|x〉〈x |A.

Then, with η(x) = −x log2(x),

H(A)ρ = Tr{η(ρA)} = Tr

{∑x

η(pX (x))|x〉〈x |A

}=∑x

η(pX (x)) Tr{|x〉〈x |A} =∑x

η(pX (x)) = H(pX ).

Quantum entropy of ρA is equal to Shannon entropy of eigenvalues.

⇒ Entropy of a pure state is equal to zero.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 76 / 113

Page 307: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bipartite pure-state entanglement

Let |ψ〉〈ψ|AB be a pure state.

By Schmidt decomposition theorem, we know that

|ψ〉AB =∑x

√pX (x)|x〉A ⊗ |x〉B ,

for prob. distribution pX and orthonormal bases {|x〉A} and {|x〉B}.

⇒ Eigenvalues of marginal states TrB{|ψ〉〈ψ|AB} and TrA{|ψ〉〈ψ|AB}are equal.

Thus, H(A)ρ = H(B)ρ if ρAB is a pure state.

Exercise: For a tripartite pure state |φ〉〈φ|ABC ,

H(A|B)φ + H(A|C )φ = 0.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 77 / 113

Page 308: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bipartite pure-state entanglement

Let |ψ〉〈ψ|AB be a pure state.

By Schmidt decomposition theorem, we know that

|ψ〉AB =∑x

√pX (x)|x〉A ⊗ |x〉B ,

for prob. distribution pX and orthonormal bases {|x〉A} and {|x〉B}.

⇒ Eigenvalues of marginal states TrB{|ψ〉〈ψ|AB} and TrA{|ψ〉〈ψ|AB}are equal.

Thus, H(A)ρ = H(B)ρ if ρAB is a pure state.

Exercise: For a tripartite pure state |φ〉〈φ|ABC ,

H(A|B)φ + H(A|C )φ = 0.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 77 / 113

Page 309: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bipartite pure-state entanglement

Let |ψ〉〈ψ|AB be a pure state.

By Schmidt decomposition theorem, we know that

|ψ〉AB =∑x

√pX (x)|x〉A ⊗ |x〉B ,

for prob. distribution pX and orthonormal bases {|x〉A} and {|x〉B}.

⇒ Eigenvalues of marginal states TrB{|ψ〉〈ψ|AB} and TrA{|ψ〉〈ψ|AB}are equal.

Thus, H(A)ρ = H(B)ρ if ρAB is a pure state.

Exercise: For a tripartite pure state |φ〉〈φ|ABC ,

H(A|B)φ + H(A|C )φ = 0.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 77 / 113

Page 310: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bipartite pure-state entanglement

Let |ψ〉〈ψ|AB be a pure state.

By Schmidt decomposition theorem, we know that

|ψ〉AB =∑x

√pX (x)|x〉A ⊗ |x〉B ,

for prob. distribution pX and orthonormal bases {|x〉A} and {|x〉B}.

⇒ Eigenvalues of marginal states TrB{|ψ〉〈ψ|AB} and TrA{|ψ〉〈ψ|AB}are equal.

Thus, H(A)ρ = H(B)ρ if ρAB is a pure state.

Exercise: For a tripartite pure state |φ〉〈φ|ABC ,

H(A|B)φ + H(A|C )φ = 0.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 77 / 113

Page 311: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bipartite pure-state entanglement

Let |ψ〉〈ψ|AB be a pure state.

By Schmidt decomposition theorem, we know that

|ψ〉AB =∑x

√pX (x)|x〉A ⊗ |x〉B ,

for prob. distribution pX and orthonormal bases {|x〉A} and {|x〉B}.

⇒ Eigenvalues of marginal states TrB{|ψ〉〈ψ|AB} and TrA{|ψ〉〈ψ|AB}are equal.

Thus, H(A)ρ = H(B)ρ if ρAB is a pure state.

Exercise: For a tripartite pure state |φ〉〈φ|ABC ,

H(A|B)φ + H(A|C )φ = 0.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 77 / 113

Page 312: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Bipartite pure-state entanglement

Let |ψ〉〈ψ|AB be a pure state.

By Schmidt decomposition theorem, we know that

|ψ〉AB =∑x

√pX (x)|x〉A ⊗ |x〉B ,

for prob. distribution pX and orthonormal bases {|x〉A} and {|x〉B}.

⇒ Eigenvalues of marginal states TrB{|ψ〉〈ψ|AB} and TrA{|ψ〉〈ψ|AB}are equal.

Thus, H(A)ρ = H(B)ρ if ρAB is a pure state.

Exercise: For a tripartite pure state |φ〉〈φ|ABC ,

H(A|B)φ + H(A|C )φ = 0.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 77 / 113

Page 313: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Conditional quantum entropy can be negative

One of the most striking differences between classical and quantuminformation theory: conditional quantum entropy can be negative.

Consider the conditional quantum entropy of the ebit |Φ〉〈Φ|AB .

The global state is pure, while the marginal TrA{|Φ〉〈Φ|AB} ismaximally mixed.

This implies that H(AB)Φ = 0 and H(B)Φ = 1, and thus

H(A|B)Φ = −1.

If a state σAB is separable, then one can show that H(A|B)σ ≥ 0. Soa negative conditional entropy implies that a state is entangled(signature of entanglement).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 78 / 113

Page 314: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Conditional quantum entropy can be negative

One of the most striking differences between classical and quantuminformation theory: conditional quantum entropy can be negative.

Consider the conditional quantum entropy of the ebit |Φ〉〈Φ|AB .

The global state is pure, while the marginal TrA{|Φ〉〈Φ|AB} ismaximally mixed.

This implies that H(AB)Φ = 0 and H(B)Φ = 1, and thus

H(A|B)Φ = −1.

If a state σAB is separable, then one can show that H(A|B)σ ≥ 0. Soa negative conditional entropy implies that a state is entangled(signature of entanglement).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 78 / 113

Page 315: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Conditional quantum entropy can be negative

One of the most striking differences between classical and quantuminformation theory: conditional quantum entropy can be negative.

Consider the conditional quantum entropy of the ebit |Φ〉〈Φ|AB .

The global state is pure, while the marginal TrA{|Φ〉〈Φ|AB} ismaximally mixed.

This implies that H(AB)Φ = 0 and H(B)Φ = 1, and thus

H(A|B)Φ = −1.

If a state σAB is separable, then one can show that H(A|B)σ ≥ 0. Soa negative conditional entropy implies that a state is entangled(signature of entanglement).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 78 / 113

Page 316: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Conditional quantum entropy can be negative

One of the most striking differences between classical and quantuminformation theory: conditional quantum entropy can be negative.

Consider the conditional quantum entropy of the ebit |Φ〉〈Φ|AB .

The global state is pure, while the marginal TrA{|Φ〉〈Φ|AB} ismaximally mixed.

This implies that H(AB)Φ = 0 and H(B)Φ = 1, and thus

H(A|B)Φ = −1.

If a state σAB is separable, then one can show that H(A|B)σ ≥ 0. Soa negative conditional entropy implies that a state is entangled(signature of entanglement).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 78 / 113

Page 317: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Conditional quantum entropy can be negative

One of the most striking differences between classical and quantuminformation theory: conditional quantum entropy can be negative.

Consider the conditional quantum entropy of the ebit |Φ〉〈Φ|AB .

The global state is pure, while the marginal TrA{|Φ〉〈Φ|AB} ismaximally mixed.

This implies that H(AB)Φ = 0 and H(B)Φ = 1, and thus

H(A|B)Φ = −1.

If a state σAB is separable, then one can show that H(A|B)σ ≥ 0. Soa negative conditional entropy implies that a state is entangled(signature of entanglement).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 78 / 113

Page 318: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Conditional quantum entropy can be negative

One of the most striking differences between classical and quantuminformation theory: conditional quantum entropy can be negative.

Consider the conditional quantum entropy of the ebit |Φ〉〈Φ|AB .

The global state is pure, while the marginal TrA{|Φ〉〈Φ|AB} ismaximally mixed.

This implies that H(AB)Φ = 0 and H(B)Φ = 1, and thus

H(A|B)Φ = −1.

If a state σAB is separable, then one can show that H(A|B)σ ≥ 0. Soa negative conditional entropy implies that a state is entangled(signature of entanglement).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 78 / 113

Page 319: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Strong subadditivity

Strong subadditivity

Let ρABC be a tripartite quantum state. Then

I (A;B|C )ρ ≥ 0.

Equivalent statements (by definition)

Entropy sum of two individual systems is larger than entropy sum oftheir union and intersection:

H(AC )ρ + H(BC )ρ ≥ H(ABC )ρ + H(C )ρ.

Conditional entropy does not decrease under the loss of system A:

H(B|C )ρ ≥ H(B|AC )ρ.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 79 / 113

Page 320: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Strong subadditivity

Strong subadditivity

Let ρABC be a tripartite quantum state. Then

I (A;B|C )ρ ≥ 0.

Equivalent statements (by definition)

Entropy sum of two individual systems is larger than entropy sum oftheir union and intersection:

H(AC )ρ + H(BC )ρ ≥ H(ABC )ρ + H(C )ρ.

Conditional entropy does not decrease under the loss of system A:

H(B|C )ρ ≥ H(B|AC )ρ.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 79 / 113

Page 321: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Strong subadditivity

Strong subadditivity

Let ρABC be a tripartite quantum state. Then

I (A;B|C )ρ ≥ 0.

Equivalent statements (by definition)

Entropy sum of two individual systems is larger than entropy sum oftheir union and intersection:

H(AC )ρ + H(BC )ρ ≥ H(ABC )ρ + H(C )ρ.

Conditional entropy does not decrease under the loss of system A:

H(B|C )ρ ≥ H(B|AC )ρ.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 79 / 113

Page 322: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Strong subadditivity

Strong subadditivity

Let ρABC be a tripartite quantum state. Then

I (A;B|C )ρ ≥ 0.

Equivalent statements (by definition)

Entropy sum of two individual systems is larger than entropy sum oftheir union and intersection:

H(AC )ρ + H(BC )ρ ≥ H(ABC )ρ + H(C )ρ.

Conditional entropy does not decrease under the loss of system A:

H(B|C )ρ ≥ H(B|AC )ρ.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 79 / 113

Page 323: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Strong subadditivity

Strong subadditivity

Let ρABC be a tripartite quantum state. Then

I (A;B|C )ρ ≥ 0.

Equivalent statements (by definition)

Entropy sum of two individual systems is larger than entropy sum oftheir union and intersection:

H(AC )ρ + H(BC )ρ ≥ H(ABC )ρ + H(C )ρ.

Conditional entropy does not decrease under the loss of system A:

H(B|C )ρ ≥ H(B|AC )ρ.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 79 / 113

Page 324: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Monogamy of entanglement

By employing strong subadditivity and the Schmidt decomposition,we see that

H(A|B)ρ + H(A|C )ρ ≥ 0.

This is a nontrivial statement for quantum states, given that H(A|B)ρcan be negative.

Thus, if H(A|B)ρ < 0, implying that Alice is entangled with Bob,then it must be the case that H(A|C )ρ is large enough such that thesum is non-negative.

Often called “monogamy of entanglement,” because it says that Alicecannot be strongly entangled with both Bob and Charlie.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 80 / 113

Page 325: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Monogamy of entanglement

By employing strong subadditivity and the Schmidt decomposition,we see that

H(A|B)ρ + H(A|C )ρ ≥ 0.

This is a nontrivial statement for quantum states, given that H(A|B)ρcan be negative.

Thus, if H(A|B)ρ < 0, implying that Alice is entangled with Bob,then it must be the case that H(A|C )ρ is large enough such that thesum is non-negative.

Often called “monogamy of entanglement,” because it says that Alicecannot be strongly entangled with both Bob and Charlie.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 80 / 113

Page 326: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Monogamy of entanglement

By employing strong subadditivity and the Schmidt decomposition,we see that

H(A|B)ρ + H(A|C )ρ ≥ 0.

This is a nontrivial statement for quantum states, given that H(A|B)ρcan be negative.

Thus, if H(A|B)ρ < 0, implying that Alice is entangled with Bob,then it must be the case that H(A|C )ρ is large enough such that thesum is non-negative.

Often called “monogamy of entanglement,” because it says that Alicecannot be strongly entangled with both Bob and Charlie.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 80 / 113

Page 327: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Monogamy of entanglement

By employing strong subadditivity and the Schmidt decomposition,we see that

H(A|B)ρ + H(A|C )ρ ≥ 0.

This is a nontrivial statement for quantum states, given that H(A|B)ρcan be negative.

Thus, if H(A|B)ρ < 0, implying that Alice is entangled with Bob,then it must be the case that H(A|C )ρ is large enough such that thesum is non-negative.

Often called “monogamy of entanglement,” because it says that Alicecannot be strongly entangled with both Bob and Charlie.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 80 / 113

Page 328: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Monogamy of entanglement

By employing strong subadditivity and the Schmidt decomposition,we see that

H(A|B)ρ + H(A|C )ρ ≥ 0.

This is a nontrivial statement for quantum states, given that H(A|B)ρcan be negative.

Thus, if H(A|B)ρ < 0, implying that Alice is entangled with Bob,then it must be the case that H(A|C )ρ is large enough such that thesum is non-negative.

Often called “monogamy of entanglement,” because it says that Alicecannot be strongly entangled with both Bob and Charlie.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 80 / 113

Page 329: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum data compression

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 81 / 113

Page 330: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum information source

We model a quantum information source as an ensemble of purestates: {pX (x), |φx〉〈φx |}.

The source has expected density matrix

ρ =∑x

pX (x)|φx〉〈φx |. (3)

Every density matrix has a spectral decomposition:

ρ =∑z

pZ (z)|z〉〈z |,

where pZ is a probability distribution and {|z〉} is an O.N. basis. Thisdecomposition in general is different from the one in (3).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 82 / 113

Page 331: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum information source

We model a quantum information source as an ensemble of purestates: {pX (x), |φx〉〈φx |}.

The source has expected density matrix

ρ =∑x

pX (x)|φx〉〈φx |. (3)

Every density matrix has a spectral decomposition:

ρ =∑z

pZ (z)|z〉〈z |,

where pZ is a probability distribution and {|z〉} is an O.N. basis. Thisdecomposition in general is different from the one in (3).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 82 / 113

Page 332: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum information source

We model a quantum information source as an ensemble of purestates: {pX (x), |φx〉〈φx |}.

The source has expected density matrix

ρ =∑x

pX (x)|φx〉〈φx |. (3)

Every density matrix has a spectral decomposition:

ρ =∑z

pZ (z)|z〉〈z |,

where pZ is a probability distribution and {|z〉} is an O.N. basis. Thisdecomposition in general is different from the one in (3).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 82 / 113

Page 333: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum information source

We model a quantum information source as an ensemble of purestates: {pX (x), |φx〉〈φx |}.

The source has expected density matrix

ρ =∑x

pX (x)|φx〉〈φx |. (3)

Every density matrix has a spectral decomposition:

ρ =∑z

pZ (z)|z〉〈z |,

where pZ is a probability distribution and {|z〉} is an O.N. basis. Thisdecomposition in general is different from the one in (3).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 82 / 113

Page 334: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum data compression protocols

Inspired by Shannon, we consider independent calls of the quantuminformation source and allow for compression schemes that haveslight error which vanishes in the limit of many calls of the source.

An (n,R, ε) quantum data compression scheme consists of anencoding channel En, with output system W , and a decoding channelDn such that

1

nlog2 dim(HW ) ≤ R,

and ∑xn

pX n(xn)F (|φxn〉〈φxn |, (Dn ◦ En)[|φxn〉〈φxn |]) ≥ 1− ε.

A rate R is achievable if for all ε ∈ (0, 1) and sufficiently large n,there exists an (n,R, ε) quantum compression scheme.

Quantum data compression limit = infimum of achievable rates.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 83 / 113

Page 335: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum data compression protocols

Inspired by Shannon, we consider independent calls of the quantuminformation source and allow for compression schemes that haveslight error which vanishes in the limit of many calls of the source.

An (n,R, ε) quantum data compression scheme consists of anencoding channel En, with output system W , and a decoding channelDn such that

1

nlog2 dim(HW ) ≤ R,

and ∑xn

pX n(xn)F (|φxn〉〈φxn |, (Dn ◦ En)[|φxn〉〈φxn |]) ≥ 1− ε.

A rate R is achievable if for all ε ∈ (0, 1) and sufficiently large n,there exists an (n,R, ε) quantum compression scheme.

Quantum data compression limit = infimum of achievable rates.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 83 / 113

Page 336: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum data compression protocols

Inspired by Shannon, we consider independent calls of the quantuminformation source and allow for compression schemes that haveslight error which vanishes in the limit of many calls of the source.

An (n,R, ε) quantum data compression scheme consists of anencoding channel En, with output system W , and a decoding channelDn such that

1

nlog2 dim(HW ) ≤ R,

and ∑xn

pX n(xn)F (|φxn〉〈φxn |, (Dn ◦ En)[|φxn〉〈φxn |]) ≥ 1− ε.

A rate R is achievable if for all ε ∈ (0, 1) and sufficiently large n,there exists an (n,R, ε) quantum compression scheme.

Quantum data compression limit = infimum of achievable rates.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 83 / 113

Page 337: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum data compression protocols

Inspired by Shannon, we consider independent calls of the quantuminformation source and allow for compression schemes that haveslight error which vanishes in the limit of many calls of the source.

An (n,R, ε) quantum data compression scheme consists of anencoding channel En, with output system W , and a decoding channelDn such that

1

nlog2 dim(HW ) ≤ R,

and ∑xn

pX n(xn)F (|φxn〉〈φxn |, (Dn ◦ En)[|φxn〉〈φxn |]) ≥ 1− ε.

A rate R is achievable if for all ε ∈ (0, 1) and sufficiently large n,there exists an (n,R, ε) quantum compression scheme.

Quantum data compression limit = infimum of achievable rates.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 83 / 113

Page 338: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum data compression protocols

Inspired by Shannon, we consider independent calls of the quantuminformation source and allow for compression schemes that haveslight error which vanishes in the limit of many calls of the source.

An (n,R, ε) quantum data compression scheme consists of anencoding channel En, with output system W , and a decoding channelDn such that

1

nlog2 dim(HW ) ≤ R,

and ∑xn

pX n(xn)F (|φxn〉〈φxn |, (Dn ◦ En)[|φxn〉〈φxn |]) ≥ 1− ε.

A rate R is achievable if for all ε ∈ (0, 1) and sufficiently large n,there exists an (n,R, ε) quantum compression scheme.

Quantum data compression limit = infimum of achievable rates.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 83 / 113

Page 339: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum data compression protocols

Inspired by Shannon, we consider independent calls of the quantuminformation source and allow for compression schemes that haveslight error which vanishes in the limit of many calls of the source.

An (n,R, ε) quantum data compression scheme consists of anencoding channel En, with output system W , and a decoding channelDn such that

1

nlog2 dim(HW ) ≤ R,

and ∑xn

pX n(xn)F (|φxn〉〈φxn |, (Dn ◦ En)[|φxn〉〈φxn |]) ≥ 1− ε.

A rate R is achievable if for all ε ∈ (0, 1) and sufficiently large n,there exists an (n,R, ε) quantum compression scheme.

Quantum data compression limit = infimum of achievable rates.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 83 / 113

Page 340: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum data compression theorem

The quantum data compression limit of a source {pX (x), |φx〉〈φx |} isequal to the quantum entropy of ρ =

∑x pX (x)|φx〉〈φx |.

Focus on achievability part. To prove it, we use the notion ofquantum typicality.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 84 / 113

Page 341: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum data compression theorem

The quantum data compression limit of a source {pX (x), |φx〉〈φx |} isequal to the quantum entropy of ρ =

∑x pX (x)|φx〉〈φx |.

Focus on achievability part. To prove it, we use the notion ofquantum typicality.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 84 / 113

Page 342: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum data compression theorem

The quantum data compression limit of a source {pX (x), |φx〉〈φx |} isequal to the quantum entropy of ρ =

∑x pX (x)|φx〉〈φx |.

Focus on achievability part. To prove it, we use the notion ofquantum typicality.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 84 / 113

Page 343: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum typicality

Given a density matrix ρ with spectral decomposition∑

z pZ (z)|z〉〈z |,define its (n, δ)-typical subspace by

T ρn,δ ≡ span

{|zn〉 :

∣∣∣∣−1

nlog2 pZn(zn)− H(ρ)

∣∣∣∣ ≤ δ} , where

pZn(zn) ≡ pZ (z1) · · · pZ (zn), |zn〉 ≡ |z1〉 ⊗ · · · ⊗ |zn〉.

Let Πρn,δ denote the projection onto T ρ

n,δ.

Then,

Tr{Πρn,δρ

⊗n} ≥ 1− ε,

(1− ε)2n[H(ρ)−δ] ≤ Tr{Πρn,δ} ≤ 2n[H(ρ)+δ],

2−n[H(ρ)+δ]Πρn,δ ≤ Πρ

n,δρ⊗nΠρ

n,δ ≤ 2−n[H(ρ)−δ]Πρn,δ.

Inequalities with ε are true for all ε ∈ (0, 1) and sufficiently large n.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 85 / 113

Page 344: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum typicality

Given a density matrix ρ with spectral decomposition∑

z pZ (z)|z〉〈z |,define its (n, δ)-typical subspace by

T ρn,δ ≡ span

{|zn〉 :

∣∣∣∣−1

nlog2 pZn(zn)− H(ρ)

∣∣∣∣ ≤ δ} , where

pZn(zn) ≡ pZ (z1) · · · pZ (zn), |zn〉 ≡ |z1〉 ⊗ · · · ⊗ |zn〉.

Let Πρn,δ denote the projection onto T ρ

n,δ.

Then,

Tr{Πρn,δρ

⊗n} ≥ 1− ε,

(1− ε)2n[H(ρ)−δ] ≤ Tr{Πρn,δ} ≤ 2n[H(ρ)+δ],

2−n[H(ρ)+δ]Πρn,δ ≤ Πρ

n,δρ⊗nΠρ

n,δ ≤ 2−n[H(ρ)−δ]Πρn,δ.

Inequalities with ε are true for all ε ∈ (0, 1) and sufficiently large n.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 85 / 113

Page 345: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum typicality

Given a density matrix ρ with spectral decomposition∑

z pZ (z)|z〉〈z |,define its (n, δ)-typical subspace by

T ρn,δ ≡ span

{|zn〉 :

∣∣∣∣−1

nlog2 pZn(zn)− H(ρ)

∣∣∣∣ ≤ δ} , where

pZn(zn) ≡ pZ (z1) · · · pZ (zn), |zn〉 ≡ |z1〉 ⊗ · · · ⊗ |zn〉.

Let Πρn,δ denote the projection onto T ρ

n,δ.

Then,

Tr{Πρn,δρ

⊗n} ≥ 1− ε,

(1− ε)2n[H(ρ)−δ] ≤ Tr{Πρn,δ} ≤ 2n[H(ρ)+δ],

2−n[H(ρ)+δ]Πρn,δ ≤ Πρ

n,δρ⊗nΠρ

n,δ ≤ 2−n[H(ρ)−δ]Πρn,δ.

Inequalities with ε are true for all ε ∈ (0, 1) and sufficiently large n.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 85 / 113

Page 346: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum typicality

Given a density matrix ρ with spectral decomposition∑

z pZ (z)|z〉〈z |,define its (n, δ)-typical subspace by

T ρn,δ ≡ span

{|zn〉 :

∣∣∣∣−1

nlog2 pZn(zn)− H(ρ)

∣∣∣∣ ≤ δ} , where

pZn(zn) ≡ pZ (z1) · · · pZ (zn), |zn〉 ≡ |z1〉 ⊗ · · · ⊗ |zn〉.

Let Πρn,δ denote the projection onto T ρ

n,δ.

Then,

Tr{Πρn,δρ

⊗n} ≥ 1− ε,

(1− ε)2n[H(ρ)−δ] ≤ Tr{Πρn,δ} ≤ 2n[H(ρ)+δ],

2−n[H(ρ)+δ]Πρn,δ ≤ Πρ

n,δρ⊗nΠρ

n,δ ≤ 2−n[H(ρ)−δ]Πρn,δ.

Inequalities with ε are true for all ε ∈ (0, 1) and sufficiently large n.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 85 / 113

Page 347: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum typicality

Given a density matrix ρ with spectral decomposition∑

z pZ (z)|z〉〈z |,define its (n, δ)-typical subspace by

T ρn,δ ≡ span

{|zn〉 :

∣∣∣∣−1

nlog2 pZn(zn)− H(ρ)

∣∣∣∣ ≤ δ} , where

pZn(zn) ≡ pZ (z1) · · · pZ (zn), |zn〉 ≡ |z1〉 ⊗ · · · ⊗ |zn〉.

Let Πρn,δ denote the projection onto T ρ

n,δ.

Then,

Tr{Πρn,δρ

⊗n} ≥ 1− ε,

(1− ε)2n[H(ρ)−δ] ≤ Tr{Πρn,δ} ≤ 2n[H(ρ)+δ],

2−n[H(ρ)+δ]Πρn,δ ≤ Πρ

n,δρ⊗nΠρ

n,δ ≤ 2−n[H(ρ)−δ]Πρn,δ.

Inequalities with ε are true for all ε ∈ (0, 1) and sufficiently large n.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 85 / 113

Page 348: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum data compression

Main idea for quantum data compression: measure typical subspace.Successful with probability 1− ε.

If successful, perform a unitary that rotates typical subspace to spaceof dimension ≤ 2n[H(ρ)+δ] (represented with n[H(ρ) + δ] qubits).

Send qubits to Bob, who then undoes the compression unitary.

Scheme is guaranteed to meet the fidelity criterion.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 86 / 113

Page 349: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum data compression

Main idea for quantum data compression: measure typical subspace.Successful with probability 1− ε.

If successful, perform a unitary that rotates typical subspace to spaceof dimension ≤ 2n[H(ρ)+δ] (represented with n[H(ρ) + δ] qubits).

Send qubits to Bob, who then undoes the compression unitary.

Scheme is guaranteed to meet the fidelity criterion.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 86 / 113

Page 350: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum data compression

Main idea for quantum data compression: measure typical subspace.Successful with probability 1− ε.

If successful, perform a unitary that rotates typical subspace to spaceof dimension ≤ 2n[H(ρ)+δ] (represented with n[H(ρ) + δ] qubits).

Send qubits to Bob, who then undoes the compression unitary.

Scheme is guaranteed to meet the fidelity criterion.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 86 / 113

Page 351: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum data compression

Main idea for quantum data compression: measure typical subspace.Successful with probability 1− ε.

If successful, perform a unitary that rotates typical subspace to spaceof dimension ≤ 2n[H(ρ)+δ] (represented with n[H(ρ) + δ] qubits).

Send qubits to Bob, who then undoes the compression unitary.

Scheme is guaranteed to meet the fidelity criterion.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 86 / 113

Page 352: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum data compression

Main idea for quantum data compression: measure typical subspace.Successful with probability 1− ε.

If successful, perform a unitary that rotates typical subspace to spaceof dimension ≤ 2n[H(ρ)+δ] (represented with n[H(ρ) + δ] qubits).

Send qubits to Bob, who then undoes the compression unitary.

Scheme is guaranteed to meet the fidelity criterion.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 86 / 113

Page 353: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Classical communication

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 87 / 113

Page 354: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Classical communication code

Suppose that Alice and Bob are connected by a quantum channelNA→B and that they are allowed to use it n times. The resultingchannel is N⊗nA→B , with Kraus operators that are tensor products ofthe individual Kraus operators.

An (n,R, ε) classical comm. code consists of an encoding channelEM′→An and a decoding measurement channel DBn→M̂ such that:

F (ΦMM̂ , (DBn→M̂ ◦ N⊗nA→B ◦ EM′→An)(ΦMM′)) ≥ 1− ε,

where

ΦMM̂ ≡1

dim(HM)

∑m

|m〉〈m|M ⊗ |m〉〈m|M̂ ,

and 1n log2(dim(HM)) ≥ R.

Note that ΦMM̂ represents a classical state, and the goal is for thecoding scheme to preserve the classical correlations in this state.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 88 / 113

Page 355: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Classical communication code

Suppose that Alice and Bob are connected by a quantum channelNA→B and that they are allowed to use it n times. The resultingchannel is N⊗nA→B , with Kraus operators that are tensor products ofthe individual Kraus operators.

An (n,R, ε) classical comm. code consists of an encoding channelEM′→An and a decoding measurement channel DBn→M̂ such that:

F (ΦMM̂ , (DBn→M̂ ◦ N⊗nA→B ◦ EM′→An)(ΦMM′)) ≥ 1− ε,

where

ΦMM̂ ≡1

dim(HM)

∑m

|m〉〈m|M ⊗ |m〉〈m|M̂ ,

and 1n log2(dim(HM)) ≥ R.

Note that ΦMM̂ represents a classical state, and the goal is for thecoding scheme to preserve the classical correlations in this state.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 88 / 113

Page 356: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Classical communication code

Suppose that Alice and Bob are connected by a quantum channelNA→B and that they are allowed to use it n times. The resultingchannel is N⊗nA→B , with Kraus operators that are tensor products ofthe individual Kraus operators.

An (n,R, ε) classical comm. code consists of an encoding channelEM′→An and a decoding measurement channel DBn→M̂ such that:

F (ΦMM̂ , (DBn→M̂ ◦ N⊗nA→B ◦ EM′→An)(ΦMM′)) ≥ 1− ε,

where

ΦMM̂ ≡1

dim(HM)

∑m

|m〉〈m|M ⊗ |m〉〈m|M̂ ,

and 1n log2(dim(HM)) ≥ R.

Note that ΦMM̂ represents a classical state, and the goal is for thecoding scheme to preserve the classical correlations in this state.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 88 / 113

Page 357: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Classical communication code

Suppose that Alice and Bob are connected by a quantum channelNA→B and that they are allowed to use it n times. The resultingchannel is N⊗nA→B , with Kraus operators that are tensor products ofthe individual Kraus operators.

An (n,R, ε) classical comm. code consists of an encoding channelEM′→An and a decoding measurement channel DBn→M̂ such that:

F (ΦMM̂ , (DBn→M̂ ◦ N⊗nA→B ◦ EM′→An)(ΦMM′)) ≥ 1− ε,

where

ΦMM̂ ≡1

dim(HM)

∑m

|m〉〈m|M ⊗ |m〉〈m|M̂ ,

and 1n log2(dim(HM)) ≥ R.

Note that ΦMM̂ represents a classical state, and the goal is for thecoding scheme to preserve the classical correlations in this state.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 88 / 113

Page 358: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Classical communication code

Suppose that Alice and Bob are connected by a quantum channelNA→B and that they are allowed to use it n times. The resultingchannel is N⊗nA→B , with Kraus operators that are tensor products ofthe individual Kraus operators.

An (n,R, ε) classical comm. code consists of an encoding channelEM′→An and a decoding measurement channel DBn→M̂ such that:

F (ΦMM̂ , (DBn→M̂ ◦ N⊗nA→B ◦ EM′→An)(ΦMM′)) ≥ 1− ε,

where

ΦMM̂ ≡1

dim(HM)

∑m

|m〉〈m|M ⊗ |m〉〈m|M̂ ,

and 1n log2(dim(HM)) ≥ R.

Note that ΦMM̂ represents a classical state, and the goal is for thecoding scheme to preserve the classical correlations in this state.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 88 / 113

Page 359: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Schematic of a classical communication code

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 89 / 113

Page 360: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Classical capacity

A rate R for classical communication is achievable if for all ε ∈ (0, 1)and sufficiently large n, there exists an (n,R, ε) classicalcommunication code.

The classical capacity C (N ) of a quantum channel N is equal to thesupremum of all achievable rates.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 90 / 113

Page 361: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Classical capacity

A rate R for classical communication is achievable if for all ε ∈ (0, 1)and sufficiently large n, there exists an (n,R, ε) classicalcommunication code.

The classical capacity C (N ) of a quantum channel N is equal to thesupremum of all achievable rates.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 90 / 113

Page 362: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Classical capacity

A rate R for classical communication is achievable if for all ε ∈ (0, 1)and sufficiently large n, there exists an (n,R, ε) classicalcommunication code.

The classical capacity C (N ) of a quantum channel N is equal to thesupremum of all achievable rates.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 90 / 113

Page 363: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

What is known about classical capacity

Lower bound on classical capacity:

χ(N ) ≤ C (N )

where χ(N ) = maxpX (x),ρxA

I (X ;B)ω,

ωXB ≡∑x

pX (x)|x〉〈x |X ⊗N (ρxA).

For some special channels, we know that χ(N ) = C (N ).

But it is also known that there exists a channel for which

χ(N ) < C (N ).

This superadditivity phenomenon is due to quantum entanglement.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 91 / 113

Page 364: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

What is known about classical capacity

Lower bound on classical capacity:

χ(N ) ≤ C (N )

where χ(N ) = maxpX (x),ρxA

I (X ;B)ω,

ωXB ≡∑x

pX (x)|x〉〈x |X ⊗N (ρxA).

For some special channels, we know that χ(N ) = C (N ).

But it is also known that there exists a channel for which

χ(N ) < C (N ).

This superadditivity phenomenon is due to quantum entanglement.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 91 / 113

Page 365: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

What is known about classical capacity

Lower bound on classical capacity:

χ(N ) ≤ C (N )

where χ(N ) = maxpX (x),ρxA

I (X ;B)ω,

ωXB ≡∑x

pX (x)|x〉〈x |X ⊗N (ρxA).

For some special channels, we know that χ(N ) = C (N ).

But it is also known that there exists a channel for which

χ(N ) < C (N ).

This superadditivity phenomenon is due to quantum entanglement.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 91 / 113

Page 366: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

What is known about classical capacity

Lower bound on classical capacity:

χ(N ) ≤ C (N )

where χ(N ) = maxpX (x),ρxA

I (X ;B)ω,

ωXB ≡∑x

pX (x)|x〉〈x |X ⊗N (ρxA).

For some special channels, we know that χ(N ) = C (N ).

But it is also known that there exists a channel for which

χ(N ) < C (N ).

This superadditivity phenomenon is due to quantum entanglement.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 91 / 113

Page 367: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Achievability part: Random coding

Borrow the idea of random coding from Shannon, but then we needto figure out a decoding channel.

Consider an ensemble {pX (x), ρxA} that Alice can pick at the channelinput. This leads to the output ensemble

{pX (x), σxA ≡ NA→B(ρxA)}.

So pick classical codewords randomly according to pX (x). This leadsto a codebook {xn(m) ≡ x1(m) · · · xn(m)}m∈[dim(HM)].

The channel output after sending the mth message is

σxn(m)Bn ≡ σx1(m)

B1⊗ · · · ⊗ σxn(m)

Bn.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 92 / 113

Page 368: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Achievability part: Random coding

Borrow the idea of random coding from Shannon, but then we needto figure out a decoding channel.

Consider an ensemble {pX (x), ρxA} that Alice can pick at the channelinput. This leads to the output ensemble

{pX (x), σxA ≡ NA→B(ρxA)}.

So pick classical codewords randomly according to pX (x). This leadsto a codebook {xn(m) ≡ x1(m) · · · xn(m)}m∈[dim(HM)].

The channel output after sending the mth message is

σxn(m)Bn ≡ σx1(m)

B1⊗ · · · ⊗ σxn(m)

Bn.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 92 / 113

Page 369: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Achievability part: Random coding

Borrow the idea of random coding from Shannon, but then we needto figure out a decoding channel.

Consider an ensemble {pX (x), ρxA} that Alice can pick at the channelinput. This leads to the output ensemble

{pX (x), σxA ≡ NA→B(ρxA)}.

So pick classical codewords randomly according to pX (x). This leadsto a codebook {xn(m) ≡ x1(m) · · · xn(m)}m∈[dim(HM)].

The channel output after sending the mth message is

σxn(m)Bn ≡ σx1(m)

B1⊗ · · · ⊗ σxn(m)

Bn.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 92 / 113

Page 370: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Achievability part: Random coding

Borrow the idea of random coding from Shannon, but then we needto figure out a decoding channel.

Consider an ensemble {pX (x), ρxA} that Alice can pick at the channelinput. This leads to the output ensemble

{pX (x), σxA ≡ NA→B(ρxA)}.

So pick classical codewords randomly according to pX (x). This leadsto a codebook {xn(m) ≡ x1(m) · · · xn(m)}m∈[dim(HM)].

The channel output after sending the mth message is

σxn(m)Bn ≡ σx1(m)

B1⊗ · · · ⊗ σxn(m)

Bn.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 92 / 113

Page 371: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Achievability part: Random coding

Borrow the idea of random coding from Shannon, but then we needto figure out a decoding channel.

Consider an ensemble {pX (x), ρxA} that Alice can pick at the channelinput. This leads to the output ensemble

{pX (x), σxA ≡ NA→B(ρxA)}.

So pick classical codewords randomly according to pX (x). This leadsto a codebook {xn(m) ≡ x1(m) · · · xn(m)}m∈[dim(HM)].

The channel output after sending the mth message is

σxn(m)Bn ≡ σx1(m)

B1⊗ · · · ⊗ σxn(m)

Bn.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 92 / 113

Page 372: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Achievability part: Sequential decoding

To every channel output σxn(m)Bn , there exists a conditionally typical

projector Πm, with properties similar to those of the typical projector.

A sequential decoding strategy consists of performing a sequence ofbinary tests using conditionally typical projectors, asking “Is it thefirst message? Is it the second message? etc.” until there is a “hit.”

When sending the mth message, the success probability in decoding itusing this strategy is

Tr{ΠmΠ̂m−1 · · · Π̂1σxn(m)Bn Π̂1 · · · Π̂m−1Πm},

where Π̂i ≡ I − Πi .

This implies that the error probability is

1− Tr{ΠmΠ̂m−1 · · · Π̂1σxn(m)Bn Π̂1 · · · Π̂m−1Πm}.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 93 / 113

Page 373: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Achievability part: Sequential decoding

To every channel output σxn(m)Bn , there exists a conditionally typical

projector Πm, with properties similar to those of the typical projector.

A sequential decoding strategy consists of performing a sequence ofbinary tests using conditionally typical projectors, asking “Is it thefirst message? Is it the second message? etc.” until there is a “hit.”

When sending the mth message, the success probability in decoding itusing this strategy is

Tr{ΠmΠ̂m−1 · · · Π̂1σxn(m)Bn Π̂1 · · · Π̂m−1Πm},

where Π̂i ≡ I − Πi .

This implies that the error probability is

1− Tr{ΠmΠ̂m−1 · · · Π̂1σxn(m)Bn Π̂1 · · · Π̂m−1Πm}.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 93 / 113

Page 374: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Achievability part: Sequential decoding

To every channel output σxn(m)Bn , there exists a conditionally typical

projector Πm, with properties similar to those of the typical projector.

A sequential decoding strategy consists of performing a sequence ofbinary tests using conditionally typical projectors, asking “Is it thefirst message? Is it the second message? etc.” until there is a “hit.”

When sending the mth message, the success probability in decoding itusing this strategy is

Tr{ΠmΠ̂m−1 · · · Π̂1σxn(m)Bn Π̂1 · · · Π̂m−1Πm},

where Π̂i ≡ I − Πi .

This implies that the error probability is

1− Tr{ΠmΠ̂m−1 · · · Π̂1σxn(m)Bn Π̂1 · · · Π̂m−1Πm}.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 93 / 113

Page 375: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Achievability part: Sequential decoding

To every channel output σxn(m)Bn , there exists a conditionally typical

projector Πm, with properties similar to those of the typical projector.

A sequential decoding strategy consists of performing a sequence ofbinary tests using conditionally typical projectors, asking “Is it thefirst message? Is it the second message? etc.” until there is a “hit.”

When sending the mth message, the success probability in decoding itusing this strategy is

Tr{ΠmΠ̂m−1 · · · Π̂1σxn(m)Bn Π̂1 · · · Π̂m−1Πm},

where Π̂i ≡ I − Πi .

This implies that the error probability is

1− Tr{ΠmΠ̂m−1 · · · Π̂1σxn(m)Bn Π̂1 · · · Π̂m−1Πm}.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 93 / 113

Page 376: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Achievability part: Sequential decoding

To every channel output σxn(m)Bn , there exists a conditionally typical

projector Πm, with properties similar to those of the typical projector.

A sequential decoding strategy consists of performing a sequence ofbinary tests using conditionally typical projectors, asking “Is it thefirst message? Is it the second message? etc.” until there is a “hit.”

When sending the mth message, the success probability in decoding itusing this strategy is

Tr{ΠmΠ̂m−1 · · · Π̂1σxn(m)Bn Π̂1 · · · Π̂m−1Πm},

where Π̂i ≡ I − Πi .

This implies that the error probability is

1− Tr{ΠmΠ̂m−1 · · · Π̂1σxn(m)Bn Π̂1 · · · Π̂m−1Πm}.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 93 / 113

Page 377: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Error Analysis

The expected channel output with respect to the code distribution isσB =

∑x pX (x)σxB , which has a typical projection Πσ.

The error probability will ultimately change just slightly byincorporating this projection into the analysis:

Tr{Πσσxn(m)Bn Πσ}−Tr{ΠmΠ̂m−1 · · · Π̂1Πσσ

xn(m)Bn ΠσΠ̂1 · · · Π̂m−1Πm}.

Using a quantum version of the union bound, this can be boundedfrom above by

2

√√√√Tr{(I − Πm)Πσσxn(m)Bn Πσ}+

m−1∑i=1

Tr{ΠiΠσσxn(m)Bn Πσ}

The two terms above are exactly analogous to similar error terms thatarise in the analysis of Shannon’s channel coding theorem.

By taking an expecation with respect to the code distribution, we canthen analyze this error.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 94 / 113

Page 378: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Error Analysis

The expected channel output with respect to the code distribution isσB =

∑x pX (x)σxB , which has a typical projection Πσ.

The error probability will ultimately change just slightly byincorporating this projection into the analysis:

Tr{Πσσxn(m)Bn Πσ}−Tr{ΠmΠ̂m−1 · · · Π̂1Πσσ

xn(m)Bn ΠσΠ̂1 · · · Π̂m−1Πm}.

Using a quantum version of the union bound, this can be boundedfrom above by

2

√√√√Tr{(I − Πm)Πσσxn(m)Bn Πσ}+

m−1∑i=1

Tr{ΠiΠσσxn(m)Bn Πσ}

The two terms above are exactly analogous to similar error terms thatarise in the analysis of Shannon’s channel coding theorem.

By taking an expecation with respect to the code distribution, we canthen analyze this error.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 94 / 113

Page 379: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Error Analysis

The expected channel output with respect to the code distribution isσB =

∑x pX (x)σxB , which has a typical projection Πσ.

The error probability will ultimately change just slightly byincorporating this projection into the analysis:

Tr{Πσσxn(m)Bn Πσ}−Tr{ΠmΠ̂m−1 · · · Π̂1Πσσ

xn(m)Bn ΠσΠ̂1 · · · Π̂m−1Πm}.

Using a quantum version of the union bound, this can be boundedfrom above by

2

√√√√Tr{(I − Πm)Πσσxn(m)Bn Πσ}+

m−1∑i=1

Tr{ΠiΠσσxn(m)Bn Πσ}

The two terms above are exactly analogous to similar error terms thatarise in the analysis of Shannon’s channel coding theorem.

By taking an expecation with respect to the code distribution, we canthen analyze this error.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 94 / 113

Page 380: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Error Analysis

The expected channel output with respect to the code distribution isσB =

∑x pX (x)σxB , which has a typical projection Πσ.

The error probability will ultimately change just slightly byincorporating this projection into the analysis:

Tr{Πσσxn(m)Bn Πσ}−Tr{ΠmΠ̂m−1 · · · Π̂1Πσσ

xn(m)Bn ΠσΠ̂1 · · · Π̂m−1Πm}.

Using a quantum version of the union bound, this can be boundedfrom above by

2

√√√√Tr{(I − Πm)Πσσxn(m)Bn Πσ}+

m−1∑i=1

Tr{ΠiΠσσxn(m)Bn Πσ}

The two terms above are exactly analogous to similar error terms thatarise in the analysis of Shannon’s channel coding theorem.

By taking an expecation with respect to the code distribution, we canthen analyze this error.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 94 / 113

Page 381: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Error Analysis

The expected channel output with respect to the code distribution isσB =

∑x pX (x)σxB , which has a typical projection Πσ.

The error probability will ultimately change just slightly byincorporating this projection into the analysis:

Tr{Πσσxn(m)Bn Πσ}−Tr{ΠmΠ̂m−1 · · · Π̂1Πσσ

xn(m)Bn ΠσΠ̂1 · · · Π̂m−1Πm}.

Using a quantum version of the union bound, this can be boundedfrom above by

2

√√√√Tr{(I − Πm)Πσσxn(m)Bn Πσ}+

m−1∑i=1

Tr{ΠiΠσσxn(m)Bn Πσ}

The two terms above are exactly analogous to similar error terms thatarise in the analysis of Shannon’s channel coding theorem.

By taking an expecation with respect to the code distribution, we canthen analyze this error.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 94 / 113

Page 382: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Error to bound:

2

√√√√EC{Tr{(I − Πm)ΠσσX n(m)Bn Πσ}}+

m−1∑i=1

EC{Tr{ΠiΠσσX n(m)Bn Πσ}}

The first term can be made small using properties of typicality.

The second term can be made small by choosing the code rate to besmaller than the mutual information I (X ;B) = H(B)− H(B|X ).Consider that

EC{Tr{ΠiΠσσxn(m)Bn Πσ}} = Tr{EX n(i){Πi}ΠσEX n(m){σ

X n(m)Bn }Πσ}

= Tr{EX n(i){Πi}Πσσ⊗nΠσ}

≤ 2−n[H(B)−δ] Tr{EX n(i){Πi}Πσ}}

≤ 2−n[H(B)−δ]EX n(i){Tr{Πi}}

≤ 2−n[H(B)−δ]2n[H(B|X )+δ]

= 2−n[I (X ;B)−2δ].

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 95 / 113

Page 383: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Error to bound:

2

√√√√EC{Tr{(I − Πm)ΠσσX n(m)Bn Πσ}}+

m−1∑i=1

EC{Tr{ΠiΠσσX n(m)Bn Πσ}}

The first term can be made small using properties of typicality.

The second term can be made small by choosing the code rate to besmaller than the mutual information I (X ;B) = H(B)− H(B|X ).Consider that

EC{Tr{ΠiΠσσxn(m)Bn Πσ}} = Tr{EX n(i){Πi}ΠσEX n(m){σ

X n(m)Bn }Πσ}

= Tr{EX n(i){Πi}Πσσ⊗nΠσ}

≤ 2−n[H(B)−δ] Tr{EX n(i){Πi}Πσ}}

≤ 2−n[H(B)−δ]EX n(i){Tr{Πi}}

≤ 2−n[H(B)−δ]2n[H(B|X )+δ]

= 2−n[I (X ;B)−2δ].

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 95 / 113

Page 384: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Error to bound:

2

√√√√EC{Tr{(I − Πm)ΠσσX n(m)Bn Πσ}}+

m−1∑i=1

EC{Tr{ΠiΠσσX n(m)Bn Πσ}}

The first term can be made small using properties of typicality.

The second term can be made small by choosing the code rate to besmaller than the mutual information I (X ;B) = H(B)− H(B|X ).Consider that

EC{Tr{ΠiΠσσxn(m)Bn Πσ}} = Tr{EX n(i){Πi}ΠσEX n(m){σ

X n(m)Bn }Πσ}

= Tr{EX n(i){Πi}Πσσ⊗nΠσ}

≤ 2−n[H(B)−δ] Tr{EX n(i){Πi}Πσ}}

≤ 2−n[H(B)−δ]EX n(i){Tr{Πi}}

≤ 2−n[H(B)−δ]2n[H(B|X )+δ]

= 2−n[I (X ;B)−2δ].

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 95 / 113

Page 385: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Error to bound:

2

√√√√EC{Tr{(I − Πm)ΠσσX n(m)Bn Πσ}}+

m−1∑i=1

EC{Tr{ΠiΠσσX n(m)Bn Πσ}}

The first term can be made small using properties of typicality.

The second term can be made small by choosing the code rate to besmaller than the mutual information I (X ;B) = H(B)− H(B|X ).Consider that

EC{Tr{ΠiΠσσxn(m)Bn Πσ}} = Tr{EX n(i){Πi}ΠσEX n(m){σ

X n(m)Bn }Πσ}

= Tr{EX n(i){Πi}Πσσ⊗nΠσ}

≤ 2−n[H(B)−δ] Tr{EX n(i){Πi}Πσ}}

≤ 2−n[H(B)−δ]EX n(i){Tr{Πi}}

≤ 2−n[H(B)−δ]2n[H(B|X )+δ]

= 2−n[I (X ;B)−2δ].

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 95 / 113

Page 386: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Conclusion of achievability part

As long as we pick dim(HM) = 2n[I (X ;B)−3δ], then there exists a codewith small error probability, which we can make approach zero bypicking n larger and larger.

We can then expurgate the code if we wish to go from average tomaximal error probability (throw away the worse half of thecodewords, as in the classical case).

So the Holevo information I (X ;B) is an achievable rate.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 96 / 113

Page 387: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Conclusion of achievability part

As long as we pick dim(HM) = 2n[I (X ;B)−3δ], then there exists a codewith small error probability, which we can make approach zero bypicking n larger and larger.

We can then expurgate the code if we wish to go from average tomaximal error probability (throw away the worse half of thecodewords, as in the classical case).

So the Holevo information I (X ;B) is an achievable rate.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 96 / 113

Page 388: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Conclusion of achievability part

As long as we pick dim(HM) = 2n[I (X ;B)−3δ], then there exists a codewith small error probability, which we can make approach zero bypicking n larger and larger.

We can then expurgate the code if we wish to go from average tomaximal error probability (throw away the worse half of thecodewords, as in the classical case).

So the Holevo information I (X ;B) is an achievable rate.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 96 / 113

Page 389: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Conclusion of achievability part

As long as we pick dim(HM) = 2n[I (X ;B)−3δ], then there exists a codewith small error probability, which we can make approach zero bypicking n larger and larger.

We can then expurgate the code if we wish to go from average tomaximal error probability (throw away the worse half of thecodewords, as in the classical case).

So the Holevo information I (X ;B) is an achievable rate.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 96 / 113

Page 390: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Converse theorem

The converse part of the theorem establishes the regularized Holevoinformation as an upper bound on classical capacity:

C (N ) ≤ limn→∞

1

nχ(N⊗n).

For some channels, such as entanglement-breaking channels, thefollowing collapse happens for all n:

1

nχ(N⊗n) = χ(N ).

But we know it does not happen in general. That is, it is known thatthere exists a channel for which

χ(N ) < limn→∞

1

nχ(N⊗n).

So there still remains quite a bit to understand about classicalcapacity.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 97 / 113

Page 391: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Converse theorem

The converse part of the theorem establishes the regularized Holevoinformation as an upper bound on classical capacity:

C (N ) ≤ limn→∞

1

nχ(N⊗n).

For some channels, such as entanglement-breaking channels, thefollowing collapse happens for all n:

1

nχ(N⊗n) = χ(N ).

But we know it does not happen in general. That is, it is known thatthere exists a channel for which

χ(N ) < limn→∞

1

nχ(N⊗n).

So there still remains quite a bit to understand about classicalcapacity.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 97 / 113

Page 392: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Converse theorem

The converse part of the theorem establishes the regularized Holevoinformation as an upper bound on classical capacity:

C (N ) ≤ limn→∞

1

nχ(N⊗n).

For some channels, such as entanglement-breaking channels, thefollowing collapse happens for all n:

1

nχ(N⊗n) = χ(N ).

But we know it does not happen in general. That is, it is known thatthere exists a channel for which

χ(N ) < limn→∞

1

nχ(N⊗n).

So there still remains quite a bit to understand about classicalcapacity.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 97 / 113

Page 393: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Converse theorem

The converse part of the theorem establishes the regularized Holevoinformation as an upper bound on classical capacity:

C (N ) ≤ limn→∞

1

nχ(N⊗n).

For some channels, such as entanglement-breaking channels, thefollowing collapse happens for all n:

1

nχ(N⊗n) = χ(N ).

But we know it does not happen in general. That is, it is known thatthere exists a channel for which

χ(N ) < limn→∞

1

nχ(N⊗n).

So there still remains quite a bit to understand about classicalcapacity.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 97 / 113

Page 394: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Converse theorem

The converse part of the theorem establishes the regularized Holevoinformation as an upper bound on classical capacity:

C (N ) ≤ limn→∞

1

nχ(N⊗n).

For some channels, such as entanglement-breaking channels, thefollowing collapse happens for all n:

1

nχ(N⊗n) = χ(N ).

But we know it does not happen in general. That is, it is known thatthere exists a channel for which

χ(N ) < limn→∞

1

nχ(N⊗n).

So there still remains quite a bit to understand about classicalcapacity.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 97 / 113

Page 395: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement-assisted comm.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 98 / 113

Page 396: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement-assisted classical communication code

Now allow for Alice and Bob to share entanglement beforecommunication begins. From super-dense coding, we know thatentanglement can double the classical capacity of a noiseless qubitchannel. What about in general?

An (n,R, ε) entanglement-assisted classical comm. code consists ofan encoding channel EM′TA→An , a decoding measurement channelDBnTB→M̂ , and an entangled state ΨTATB

such that:

F (ΦMM̂ , (DBnTB→M̂ ◦ N⊗nA→B ◦ EM′TA→An)(ΦMM′ ⊗ΨTATB

)) ≥ 1− ε,

where

ΦMM̂ ≡1

dim(HM)

∑m

|m〉〈m|M ⊗ |m〉〈m|M̂ ,

and 1n log2(dim(HM)) ≥ R.

The goal again is for the coding scheme to preserve the classicalcorrelations in the state ΦMM̂ .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 99 / 113

Page 397: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement-assisted classical communication code

Now allow for Alice and Bob to share entanglement beforecommunication begins. From super-dense coding, we know thatentanglement can double the classical capacity of a noiseless qubitchannel. What about in general?

An (n,R, ε) entanglement-assisted classical comm. code consists ofan encoding channel EM′TA→An , a decoding measurement channelDBnTB→M̂ , and an entangled state ΨTATB

such that:

F (ΦMM̂ , (DBnTB→M̂ ◦ N⊗nA→B ◦ EM′TA→An)(ΦMM′ ⊗ΨTATB

)) ≥ 1− ε,

where

ΦMM̂ ≡1

dim(HM)

∑m

|m〉〈m|M ⊗ |m〉〈m|M̂ ,

and 1n log2(dim(HM)) ≥ R.

The goal again is for the coding scheme to preserve the classicalcorrelations in the state ΦMM̂ .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 99 / 113

Page 398: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement-assisted classical communication code

Now allow for Alice and Bob to share entanglement beforecommunication begins. From super-dense coding, we know thatentanglement can double the classical capacity of a noiseless qubitchannel. What about in general?

An (n,R, ε) entanglement-assisted classical comm. code consists ofan encoding channel EM′TA→An , a decoding measurement channelDBnTB→M̂ , and an entangled state ΨTATB

such that:

F (ΦMM̂ , (DBnTB→M̂ ◦ N⊗nA→B ◦ EM′TA→An)(ΦMM′ ⊗ΨTATB

)) ≥ 1− ε,

where

ΦMM̂ ≡1

dim(HM)

∑m

|m〉〈m|M ⊗ |m〉〈m|M̂ ,

and 1n log2(dim(HM)) ≥ R.

The goal again is for the coding scheme to preserve the classicalcorrelations in the state ΦMM̂ .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 99 / 113

Page 399: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement-assisted classical communication code

Now allow for Alice and Bob to share entanglement beforecommunication begins. From super-dense coding, we know thatentanglement can double the classical capacity of a noiseless qubitchannel. What about in general?

An (n,R, ε) entanglement-assisted classical comm. code consists ofan encoding channel EM′TA→An , a decoding measurement channelDBnTB→M̂ , and an entangled state ΨTATB

such that:

F (ΦMM̂ , (DBnTB→M̂ ◦ N⊗nA→B ◦ EM′TA→An)(ΦMM′ ⊗ΨTATB

)) ≥ 1− ε,

where

ΦMM̂ ≡1

dim(HM)

∑m

|m〉〈m|M ⊗ |m〉〈m|M̂ ,

and 1n log2(dim(HM)) ≥ R.

The goal again is for the coding scheme to preserve the classicalcorrelations in the state ΦMM̂ .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 99 / 113

Page 400: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement-assisted classical communication code

Now allow for Alice and Bob to share entanglement beforecommunication begins. From super-dense coding, we know thatentanglement can double the classical capacity of a noiseless qubitchannel. What about in general?

An (n,R, ε) entanglement-assisted classical comm. code consists ofan encoding channel EM′TA→An , a decoding measurement channelDBnTB→M̂ , and an entangled state ΨTATB

such that:

F (ΦMM̂ , (DBnTB→M̂ ◦ N⊗nA→B ◦ EM′TA→An)(ΦMM′ ⊗ΨTATB

)) ≥ 1− ε,

where

ΦMM̂ ≡1

dim(HM)

∑m

|m〉〈m|M ⊗ |m〉〈m|M̂ ,

and 1n log2(dim(HM)) ≥ R.

The goal again is for the coding scheme to preserve the classicalcorrelations in the state ΦMM̂ .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 99 / 113

Page 401: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Schematic of an EA classical communication code

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 100 / 113

Page 402: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement-assisted classical capacity

A rate R for entanglement-assisted (EA) classical communication isachievable if for all ε ∈ (0, 1) and sufficiently large n, there exists an(n,R, ε) EA classical communication code.

The EA classical capacity CEA(N ) of a quantum channel N is equalto the supremum of all achievable rates.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 101 / 113

Page 403: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement-assisted classical capacity

A rate R for entanglement-assisted (EA) classical communication isachievable if for all ε ∈ (0, 1) and sufficiently large n, there exists an(n,R, ε) EA classical communication code.

The EA classical capacity CEA(N ) of a quantum channel N is equalto the supremum of all achievable rates.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 101 / 113

Page 404: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement-assisted classical capacity

A rate R for entanglement-assisted (EA) classical communication isachievable if for all ε ∈ (0, 1) and sufficiently large n, there exists an(n,R, ε) EA classical communication code.

The EA classical capacity CEA(N ) of a quantum channel N is equalto the supremum of all achievable rates.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 101 / 113

Page 405: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

What is known about entanglement-assisted capacity

Entanglement-assisted capacity theorem:

CEA(N ) = I (N )

where I (N ) = maxφRA

I (R;B)ω,

ωRB ≡ NA→B(φRA).

Thus, this problem is completely solved!

CEA(N ) does not change if there is a quantum feedback channel fromBob to Alice. We even know strong converse theorems for this settingas well. In these senses, the entanglement-assisted capacity representsthe fully quantum analog of Shannon’s channel capacity theorem.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 102 / 113

Page 406: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

What is known about entanglement-assisted capacity

Entanglement-assisted capacity theorem:

CEA(N ) = I (N )

where I (N ) = maxφRA

I (R;B)ω,

ωRB ≡ NA→B(φRA).

Thus, this problem is completely solved!

CEA(N ) does not change if there is a quantum feedback channel fromBob to Alice. We even know strong converse theorems for this settingas well. In these senses, the entanglement-assisted capacity representsthe fully quantum analog of Shannon’s channel capacity theorem.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 102 / 113

Page 407: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

What is known about entanglement-assisted capacity

Entanglement-assisted capacity theorem:

CEA(N ) = I (N )

where I (N ) = maxφRA

I (R;B)ω,

ωRB ≡ NA→B(φRA).

Thus, this problem is completely solved!

CEA(N ) does not change if there is a quantum feedback channel fromBob to Alice. We even know strong converse theorems for this settingas well. In these senses, the entanglement-assisted capacity representsthe fully quantum analog of Shannon’s channel capacity theorem.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 102 / 113

Page 408: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

What is known about entanglement-assisted capacity

Entanglement-assisted capacity theorem:

CEA(N ) = I (N )

where I (N ) = maxφRA

I (R;B)ω,

ωRB ≡ NA→B(φRA).

Thus, this problem is completely solved!

CEA(N ) does not change if there is a quantum feedback channel fromBob to Alice. We even know strong converse theorems for this settingas well. In these senses, the entanglement-assisted capacity representsthe fully quantum analog of Shannon’s channel capacity theorem.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 102 / 113

Page 409: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement-assisted coding (simple version)

Allow Alice and Bob to share a maximally entangled state |Φ〉〈Φ|AB .

They then induce the following ensemble by Alice applying arandomly selected, generalized Pauli operator to her input:{

d−2, (NA→B′ ⊗ idB) (|Φx ,zAB〉〈Φ

x ,zAB |)

}.

where |Φx ,z〉AB = X (x)A Z (z)A |Φ〉AB . (This is the same ensemblefrom super-dense coding if N is the identity channel.)

By previous achievability result and some entropy manipulations, wecan conclude that the mutual information I (B ′;B)N (Φ) is achievable.

More general argument establishes that I (B ′;B)N (φ) is achievable,where φAB is a pure bipartite state. So then CEA(N ) ≥ I (N ).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 103 / 113

Page 410: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement-assisted coding (simple version)

Allow Alice and Bob to share a maximally entangled state |Φ〉〈Φ|AB .

They then induce the following ensemble by Alice applying arandomly selected, generalized Pauli operator to her input:{

d−2, (NA→B′ ⊗ idB) (|Φx ,zAB〉〈Φ

x ,zAB |)

}.

where |Φx ,z〉AB = X (x)A Z (z)A |Φ〉AB . (This is the same ensemblefrom super-dense coding if N is the identity channel.)

By previous achievability result and some entropy manipulations, wecan conclude that the mutual information I (B ′;B)N (Φ) is achievable.

More general argument establishes that I (B ′;B)N (φ) is achievable,where φAB is a pure bipartite state. So then CEA(N ) ≥ I (N ).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 103 / 113

Page 411: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement-assisted coding (simple version)

Allow Alice and Bob to share a maximally entangled state |Φ〉〈Φ|AB .

They then induce the following ensemble by Alice applying arandomly selected, generalized Pauli operator to her input:{

d−2, (NA→B′ ⊗ idB) (|Φx ,zAB〉〈Φ

x ,zAB |)

}.

where |Φx ,z〉AB = X (x)A Z (z)A |Φ〉AB . (This is the same ensemblefrom super-dense coding if N is the identity channel.)

By previous achievability result and some entropy manipulations, wecan conclude that the mutual information I (B ′;B)N (Φ) is achievable.

More general argument establishes that I (B ′;B)N (φ) is achievable,where φAB is a pure bipartite state. So then CEA(N ) ≥ I (N ).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 103 / 113

Page 412: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement-assisted coding (simple version)

Allow Alice and Bob to share a maximally entangled state |Φ〉〈Φ|AB .

They then induce the following ensemble by Alice applying arandomly selected, generalized Pauli operator to her input:{

d−2, (NA→B′ ⊗ idB) (|Φx ,zAB〉〈Φ

x ,zAB |)

}.

where |Φx ,z〉AB = X (x)A Z (z)A |Φ〉AB . (This is the same ensemblefrom super-dense coding if N is the identity channel.)

By previous achievability result and some entropy manipulations, wecan conclude that the mutual information I (B ′;B)N (Φ) is achievable.

More general argument establishes that I (B ′;B)N (φ) is achievable,where φAB is a pure bipartite state. So then CEA(N ) ≥ I (N ).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 103 / 113

Page 413: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement-assisted coding (simple version)

Allow Alice and Bob to share a maximally entangled state |Φ〉〈Φ|AB .

They then induce the following ensemble by Alice applying arandomly selected, generalized Pauli operator to her input:{

d−2, (NA→B′ ⊗ idB) (|Φx ,zAB〉〈Φ

x ,zAB |)

}.

where |Φx ,z〉AB = X (x)A Z (z)A |Φ〉AB . (This is the same ensemblefrom super-dense coding if N is the identity channel.)

By previous achievability result and some entropy manipulations, wecan conclude that the mutual information I (B ′;B)N (Φ) is achievable.

More general argument establishes that I (B ′;B)N (φ) is achievable,where φAB is a pure bipartite state. So then CEA(N ) ≥ I (N ).

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 103 / 113

Page 414: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement-assisted converse theorem

Employ data processing and the chain rule for conditional mutualinformation to conclude that

CEA(N ) ≤ I (N ).

Can even establish this bound when there is a quantum feedbackchannel of unlimited dimension connecting Bob to Alice, a setup like

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 104 / 113

Page 415: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement-assisted converse theorem

Employ data processing and the chain rule for conditional mutualinformation to conclude that

CEA(N ) ≤ I (N ).

Can even establish this bound when there is a quantum feedbackchannel of unlimited dimension connecting Bob to Alice, a setup like

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 104 / 113

Page 416: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Entanglement-assisted converse theorem

Employ data processing and the chain rule for conditional mutualinformation to conclude that

CEA(N ) ≤ I (N ).

Can even establish this bound when there is a quantum feedbackchannel of unlimited dimension connecting Bob to Alice, a setup like

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 104 / 113

Page 417: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum communication

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 105 / 113

Page 418: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum communication code

Now Alice would like to transmit quantum information intact to orgenerate entanglement with Bob, perhaps for some distributedquantum computation.

An (n,R, ε) quantum communication code consists of an encodingchannel EM′→An and a decoding channel DBn→M̂ such that:

F (ΦMM̂ , (DBn→M̂ ◦ N⊗nA→B ◦ EM′→An)(ΦMM′)) ≥ 1− ε,

where ΦMM̂ is the maximally entangled state:

ΦMM̂ ≡1

dim(HM)

∑m,m′

|m〉〈m′|M ⊗ |m〉〈m′|M̂ ,

and 1n log2(dim(HM)) ≥ R.

The goal now is for the coding scheme to preserve the quantumcorrelations in the state ΦMM̂ .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 106 / 113

Page 419: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum communication code

Now Alice would like to transmit quantum information intact to orgenerate entanglement with Bob, perhaps for some distributedquantum computation.

An (n,R, ε) quantum communication code consists of an encodingchannel EM′→An and a decoding channel DBn→M̂ such that:

F (ΦMM̂ , (DBn→M̂ ◦ N⊗nA→B ◦ EM′→An)(ΦMM′)) ≥ 1− ε,

where ΦMM̂ is the maximally entangled state:

ΦMM̂ ≡1

dim(HM)

∑m,m′

|m〉〈m′|M ⊗ |m〉〈m′|M̂ ,

and 1n log2(dim(HM)) ≥ R.

The goal now is for the coding scheme to preserve the quantumcorrelations in the state ΦMM̂ .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 106 / 113

Page 420: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum communication code

Now Alice would like to transmit quantum information intact to orgenerate entanglement with Bob, perhaps for some distributedquantum computation.

An (n,R, ε) quantum communication code consists of an encodingchannel EM′→An and a decoding channel DBn→M̂ such that:

F (ΦMM̂ , (DBn→M̂ ◦ N⊗nA→B ◦ EM′→An)(ΦMM′)) ≥ 1− ε,

where ΦMM̂ is the maximally entangled state:

ΦMM̂ ≡1

dim(HM)

∑m,m′

|m〉〈m′|M ⊗ |m〉〈m′|M̂ ,

and 1n log2(dim(HM)) ≥ R.

The goal now is for the coding scheme to preserve the quantumcorrelations in the state ΦMM̂ .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 106 / 113

Page 421: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum communication code

Now Alice would like to transmit quantum information intact to orgenerate entanglement with Bob, perhaps for some distributedquantum computation.

An (n,R, ε) quantum communication code consists of an encodingchannel EM′→An and a decoding channel DBn→M̂ such that:

F (ΦMM̂ , (DBn→M̂ ◦ N⊗nA→B ◦ EM′→An)(ΦMM′)) ≥ 1− ε,

where ΦMM̂ is the maximally entangled state:

ΦMM̂ ≡1

dim(HM)

∑m,m′

|m〉〈m′|M ⊗ |m〉〈m′|M̂ ,

and 1n log2(dim(HM)) ≥ R.

The goal now is for the coding scheme to preserve the quantumcorrelations in the state ΦMM̂ .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 106 / 113

Page 422: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum communication code

Now Alice would like to transmit quantum information intact to orgenerate entanglement with Bob, perhaps for some distributedquantum computation.

An (n,R, ε) quantum communication code consists of an encodingchannel EM′→An and a decoding channel DBn→M̂ such that:

F (ΦMM̂ , (DBn→M̂ ◦ N⊗nA→B ◦ EM′→An)(ΦMM′)) ≥ 1− ε,

where ΦMM̂ is the maximally entangled state:

ΦMM̂ ≡1

dim(HM)

∑m,m′

|m〉〈m′|M ⊗ |m〉〈m′|M̂ ,

and 1n log2(dim(HM)) ≥ R.

The goal now is for the coding scheme to preserve the quantumcorrelations in the state ΦMM̂ .

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 106 / 113

Page 423: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum capacity

A rate R for quantum communication is achievable if for all ε ∈ (0, 1)and sufficiently large n, there exists an (n,R, ε) quantumcommunication code.

The quantum capacity Q(N ) of a quantum channel N is equal to thesupremum of all achievable rates.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 107 / 113

Page 424: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum capacity

A rate R for quantum communication is achievable if for all ε ∈ (0, 1)and sufficiently large n, there exists an (n,R, ε) quantumcommunication code.

The quantum capacity Q(N ) of a quantum channel N is equal to thesupremum of all achievable rates.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 107 / 113

Page 425: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Quantum capacity

A rate R for quantum communication is achievable if for all ε ∈ (0, 1)and sufficiently large n, there exists an (n,R, ε) quantumcommunication code.

The quantum capacity Q(N ) of a quantum channel N is equal to thesupremum of all achievable rates.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 107 / 113

Page 426: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

What is known about quantum capacity

Coherent information lower bound on quantum capacity:

Ic(N ) ≤ Q(N )

where Ic(N ) = maxφRA

I (R〉B)ω,

ωRB ≡ NA→B(φRA).

If a quantum channel is degradable (meaning that the receiver cansimulate the channel from the input to the environment), then

Ic(N ) = Q(N ).

A number of interesting quantum channels have this property.

Quantum capacity is not known for most non-degradable channels. Italso exhibits a striking effect called superactivation: there existzero-quantum capacity channels such that they can combine to havea non-zero quantum capacity. (This does not occur for the basicsetups in classical information theory.)

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 108 / 113

Page 427: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

What is known about quantum capacity

Coherent information lower bound on quantum capacity:

Ic(N ) ≤ Q(N )

where Ic(N ) = maxφRA

I (R〉B)ω,

ωRB ≡ NA→B(φRA).

If a quantum channel is degradable (meaning that the receiver cansimulate the channel from the input to the environment), then

Ic(N ) = Q(N ).

A number of interesting quantum channels have this property.

Quantum capacity is not known for most non-degradable channels. Italso exhibits a striking effect called superactivation: there existzero-quantum capacity channels such that they can combine to havea non-zero quantum capacity. (This does not occur for the basicsetups in classical information theory.)

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 108 / 113

Page 428: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

What is known about quantum capacity

Coherent information lower bound on quantum capacity:

Ic(N ) ≤ Q(N )

where Ic(N ) = maxφRA

I (R〉B)ω,

ωRB ≡ NA→B(φRA).

If a quantum channel is degradable (meaning that the receiver cansimulate the channel from the input to the environment), then

Ic(N ) = Q(N ).

A number of interesting quantum channels have this property.

Quantum capacity is not known for most non-degradable channels. Italso exhibits a striking effect called superactivation: there existzero-quantum capacity channels such that they can combine to havea non-zero quantum capacity. (This does not occur for the basicsetups in classical information theory.)

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 108 / 113

Page 429: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

What is known about quantum capacity

Coherent information lower bound on quantum capacity:

Ic(N ) ≤ Q(N )

where Ic(N ) = maxφRA

I (R〉B)ω,

ωRB ≡ NA→B(φRA).

If a quantum channel is degradable (meaning that the receiver cansimulate the channel from the input to the environment), then

Ic(N ) = Q(N ).

A number of interesting quantum channels have this property.

Quantum capacity is not known for most non-degradable channels. Italso exhibits a striking effect called superactivation: there existzero-quantum capacity channels such that they can combine to havea non-zero quantum capacity. (This does not occur for the basicsetups in classical information theory.)

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 108 / 113

Page 430: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Achieving the coherent information

There are now many coding methods known for achieving thecoherent information rate.

Perhaps the most prominent is known as the decoupling method.

Suppose that Alice, Bob, and Eve share a tripartite pure entangledstate |ψ〉〈ψ|RBE after Alice transmits her share of the entanglementwith the reference through a noisy channel.

Then if the reduced state ψRE on the reference system and Eve’ssystem is approximately decoupled, meaning that

‖ψRE − ψR ⊗ σE‖1 ≤ ε,

where σE is arbitrary state, this implies that Bob can decode quantuminformation that Alice intended to send to him. Can show thatdecoupling is possible as long as qubit rate ≈ coherent information.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 109 / 113

Page 431: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Achieving the coherent information

There are now many coding methods known for achieving thecoherent information rate.

Perhaps the most prominent is known as the decoupling method.

Suppose that Alice, Bob, and Eve share a tripartite pure entangledstate |ψ〉〈ψ|RBE after Alice transmits her share of the entanglementwith the reference through a noisy channel.

Then if the reduced state ψRE on the reference system and Eve’ssystem is approximately decoupled, meaning that

‖ψRE − ψR ⊗ σE‖1 ≤ ε,

where σE is arbitrary state, this implies that Bob can decode quantuminformation that Alice intended to send to him. Can show thatdecoupling is possible as long as qubit rate ≈ coherent information.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 109 / 113

Page 432: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Achieving the coherent information

There are now many coding methods known for achieving thecoherent information rate.

Perhaps the most prominent is known as the decoupling method.

Suppose that Alice, Bob, and Eve share a tripartite pure entangledstate |ψ〉〈ψ|RBE after Alice transmits her share of the entanglementwith the reference through a noisy channel.

Then if the reduced state ψRE on the reference system and Eve’ssystem is approximately decoupled, meaning that

‖ψRE − ψR ⊗ σE‖1 ≤ ε,

where σE is arbitrary state, this implies that Bob can decode quantuminformation that Alice intended to send to him. Can show thatdecoupling is possible as long as qubit rate ≈ coherent information.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 109 / 113

Page 433: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Achieving the coherent information

There are now many coding methods known for achieving thecoherent information rate.

Perhaps the most prominent is known as the decoupling method.

Suppose that Alice, Bob, and Eve share a tripartite pure entangledstate |ψ〉〈ψ|RBE after Alice transmits her share of the entanglementwith the reference through a noisy channel.

Then if the reduced state ψRE on the reference system and Eve’ssystem is approximately decoupled, meaning that

‖ψRE − ψR ⊗ σE‖1 ≤ ε,

where σE is arbitrary state, this implies that Bob can decode quantuminformation that Alice intended to send to him. Can show thatdecoupling is possible as long as qubit rate ≈ coherent information.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 109 / 113

Page 434: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Achieving the coherent information

There are now many coding methods known for achieving thecoherent information rate.

Perhaps the most prominent is known as the decoupling method.

Suppose that Alice, Bob, and Eve share a tripartite pure entangledstate |ψ〉〈ψ|RBE after Alice transmits her share of the entanglementwith the reference through a noisy channel.

Then if the reduced state ψRE on the reference system and Eve’ssystem is approximately decoupled, meaning that

‖ψRE − ψR ⊗ σE‖1 ≤ ε,

where σE is arbitrary state, this implies that Bob can decode quantuminformation that Alice intended to send to him. Can show thatdecoupling is possible as long as qubit rate ≈ coherent information.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 109 / 113

Page 435: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Decoupling method

Why does this work? Suppose the state is exactly decoupled. Thenone purification of the state ψRE is the state |ψ〉〈ψ|RBE that theyshare after the channel acts.

Another purification of ψRE = ψR ⊗ σE is |ψ〉〈ψ|RB1 ⊗ |σ〉〈σ|B2E ,where |ψ〉〈ψ|RB1 is the original state that Alice sent through thechannel and |σ〉〈σ|B2E is some other state that purifies the state σEof the environment.

All purifications are related by isometries and Bob possesses thepurification of R and E ,

⇒ There exists some unitary UB→B1B2 such that

UB→B1B2 |ψ〉RBE = |ψ〉RB1 ⊗ |σ〉B2E.

This unitary is then Bob’s decoder!

Thus, the decoupling condition implies the existence of a decoder forBob, so that it is only necessary to show the existence of an encoderthat decouples the reference from the environment.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 110 / 113

Page 436: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Decoupling method

Why does this work? Suppose the state is exactly decoupled. Thenone purification of the state ψRE is the state |ψ〉〈ψ|RBE that theyshare after the channel acts.

Another purification of ψRE = ψR ⊗ σE is |ψ〉〈ψ|RB1 ⊗ |σ〉〈σ|B2E ,where |ψ〉〈ψ|RB1 is the original state that Alice sent through thechannel and |σ〉〈σ|B2E is some other state that purifies the state σEof the environment.

All purifications are related by isometries and Bob possesses thepurification of R and E ,

⇒ There exists some unitary UB→B1B2 such that

UB→B1B2 |ψ〉RBE = |ψ〉RB1 ⊗ |σ〉B2E.

This unitary is then Bob’s decoder!

Thus, the decoupling condition implies the existence of a decoder forBob, so that it is only necessary to show the existence of an encoderthat decouples the reference from the environment.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 110 / 113

Page 437: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Decoupling method

Why does this work? Suppose the state is exactly decoupled. Thenone purification of the state ψRE is the state |ψ〉〈ψ|RBE that theyshare after the channel acts.

Another purification of ψRE = ψR ⊗ σE is |ψ〉〈ψ|RB1 ⊗ |σ〉〈σ|B2E ,where |ψ〉〈ψ|RB1 is the original state that Alice sent through thechannel and |σ〉〈σ|B2E is some other state that purifies the state σEof the environment.

All purifications are related by isometries and Bob possesses thepurification of R and E ,

⇒ There exists some unitary UB→B1B2 such that

UB→B1B2 |ψ〉RBE = |ψ〉RB1 ⊗ |σ〉B2E.

This unitary is then Bob’s decoder!

Thus, the decoupling condition implies the existence of a decoder forBob, so that it is only necessary to show the existence of an encoderthat decouples the reference from the environment.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 110 / 113

Page 438: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Decoupling method

Why does this work? Suppose the state is exactly decoupled. Thenone purification of the state ψRE is the state |ψ〉〈ψ|RBE that theyshare after the channel acts.

Another purification of ψRE = ψR ⊗ σE is |ψ〉〈ψ|RB1 ⊗ |σ〉〈σ|B2E ,where |ψ〉〈ψ|RB1 is the original state that Alice sent through thechannel and |σ〉〈σ|B2E is some other state that purifies the state σEof the environment.

All purifications are related by isometries and Bob possesses thepurification of R and E ,

⇒ There exists some unitary UB→B1B2 such that

UB→B1B2 |ψ〉RBE = |ψ〉RB1 ⊗ |σ〉B2E.

This unitary is then Bob’s decoder!

Thus, the decoupling condition implies the existence of a decoder forBob, so that it is only necessary to show the existence of an encoderthat decouples the reference from the environment.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 110 / 113

Page 439: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Decoupling method

Why does this work? Suppose the state is exactly decoupled. Thenone purification of the state ψRE is the state |ψ〉〈ψ|RBE that theyshare after the channel acts.

Another purification of ψRE = ψR ⊗ σE is |ψ〉〈ψ|RB1 ⊗ |σ〉〈σ|B2E ,where |ψ〉〈ψ|RB1 is the original state that Alice sent through thechannel and |σ〉〈σ|B2E is some other state that purifies the state σEof the environment.

All purifications are related by isometries and Bob possesses thepurification of R and E ,

⇒ There exists some unitary UB→B1B2 such that

UB→B1B2 |ψ〉RBE = |ψ〉RB1 ⊗ |σ〉B2E.

This unitary is then Bob’s decoder!

Thus, the decoupling condition implies the existence of a decoder forBob, so that it is only necessary to show the existence of an encoderthat decouples the reference from the environment.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 110 / 113

Page 440: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Decoupling method

Why does this work? Suppose the state is exactly decoupled. Thenone purification of the state ψRE is the state |ψ〉〈ψ|RBE that theyshare after the channel acts.

Another purification of ψRE = ψR ⊗ σE is |ψ〉〈ψ|RB1 ⊗ |σ〉〈σ|B2E ,where |ψ〉〈ψ|RB1 is the original state that Alice sent through thechannel and |σ〉〈σ|B2E is some other state that purifies the state σEof the environment.

All purifications are related by isometries and Bob possesses thepurification of R and E ,

⇒ There exists some unitary UB→B1B2 such that

UB→B1B2 |ψ〉RBE = |ψ〉RB1 ⊗ |σ〉B2E.

This unitary is then Bob’s decoder!

Thus, the decoupling condition implies the existence of a decoder forBob, so that it is only necessary to show the existence of an encoderthat decouples the reference from the environment.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 110 / 113

Page 441: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Future directions

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 111 / 113

Page 442: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Open questions

It might be difficult to find a general formula for quantum capacity.Some suspect that the quantity is uncomputable.

Other capacities: private capacity, locking capacity, data hidingcapacity (some results known but many questions remain).

Constructing codes for quantum channels. Major open question forquantum polar codes is to find an efficiently implementable decoder.

Network quantum information theory: Some results known formultiple access, broadcast, interference, relay channels. Major openquestion is to prove the existence of a quantum simultaneous decoder(special cases known, but general case is open).

Strong converses and 2nd-order asymptotics. Some results known.Major open question to establish strong converse property forquantum capacity of degradable channels. Open: 2nd-orderasymptotics for entanglement-assisted capacity of all channels.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 112 / 113

Page 443: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Open questions

It might be difficult to find a general formula for quantum capacity.Some suspect that the quantity is uncomputable.

Other capacities: private capacity, locking capacity, data hidingcapacity (some results known but many questions remain).

Constructing codes for quantum channels. Major open question forquantum polar codes is to find an efficiently implementable decoder.

Network quantum information theory: Some results known formultiple access, broadcast, interference, relay channels. Major openquestion is to prove the existence of a quantum simultaneous decoder(special cases known, but general case is open).

Strong converses and 2nd-order asymptotics. Some results known.Major open question to establish strong converse property forquantum capacity of degradable channels. Open: 2nd-orderasymptotics for entanglement-assisted capacity of all channels.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 112 / 113

Page 444: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Open questions

It might be difficult to find a general formula for quantum capacity.Some suspect that the quantity is uncomputable.

Other capacities: private capacity, locking capacity, data hidingcapacity (some results known but many questions remain).

Constructing codes for quantum channels. Major open question forquantum polar codes is to find an efficiently implementable decoder.

Network quantum information theory: Some results known formultiple access, broadcast, interference, relay channels. Major openquestion is to prove the existence of a quantum simultaneous decoder(special cases known, but general case is open).

Strong converses and 2nd-order asymptotics. Some results known.Major open question to establish strong converse property forquantum capacity of degradable channels. Open: 2nd-orderasymptotics for entanglement-assisted capacity of all channels.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 112 / 113

Page 445: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Open questions

It might be difficult to find a general formula for quantum capacity.Some suspect that the quantity is uncomputable.

Other capacities: private capacity, locking capacity, data hidingcapacity (some results known but many questions remain).

Constructing codes for quantum channels. Major open question forquantum polar codes is to find an efficiently implementable decoder.

Network quantum information theory: Some results known formultiple access, broadcast, interference, relay channels. Major openquestion is to prove the existence of a quantum simultaneous decoder(special cases known, but general case is open).

Strong converses and 2nd-order asymptotics. Some results known.Major open question to establish strong converse property forquantum capacity of degradable channels. Open: 2nd-orderasymptotics for entanglement-assisted capacity of all channels.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 112 / 113

Page 446: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Open questions

It might be difficult to find a general formula for quantum capacity.Some suspect that the quantity is uncomputable.

Other capacities: private capacity, locking capacity, data hidingcapacity (some results known but many questions remain).

Constructing codes for quantum channels. Major open question forquantum polar codes is to find an efficiently implementable decoder.

Network quantum information theory: Some results known formultiple access, broadcast, interference, relay channels. Major openquestion is to prove the existence of a quantum simultaneous decoder(special cases known, but general case is open).

Strong converses and 2nd-order asymptotics. Some results known.Major open question to establish strong converse property forquantum capacity of degradable channels. Open: 2nd-orderasymptotics for entanglement-assisted capacity of all channels.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 112 / 113

Page 447: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Open questions

It might be difficult to find a general formula for quantum capacity.Some suspect that the quantity is uncomputable.

Other capacities: private capacity, locking capacity, data hidingcapacity (some results known but many questions remain).

Constructing codes for quantum channels. Major open question forquantum polar codes is to find an efficiently implementable decoder.

Network quantum information theory: Some results known formultiple access, broadcast, interference, relay channels. Major openquestion is to prove the existence of a quantum simultaneous decoder(special cases known, but general case is open).

Strong converses and 2nd-order asymptotics. Some results known.Major open question to establish strong converse property forquantum capacity of degradable channels. Open: 2nd-orderasymptotics for entanglement-assisted capacity of all channels.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 112 / 113

Page 448: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Other topics

Capacities of Gaussian quantum channels. These model practicalcommunication channels. A number of open questions remain here.(see Shannon lecture of Holevo).

Covert communication over quantum channels. (Informal workshopon Wednesday afternoon).

Quantum channels with memory.

Security of quantum cryptography (bringing theoretical securityproofs closer to experimental implementations).

Reformulating thermodynamics in the quantum regime using sometools of quantum information theory.

Quantifying entanglement (resource theory of entanglement).

Strengthenings of fundamental quantum entropy inequalities.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 113 / 113

Page 449: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Other topics

Capacities of Gaussian quantum channels. These model practicalcommunication channels. A number of open questions remain here.(see Shannon lecture of Holevo).

Covert communication over quantum channels. (Informal workshopon Wednesday afternoon).

Quantum channels with memory.

Security of quantum cryptography (bringing theoretical securityproofs closer to experimental implementations).

Reformulating thermodynamics in the quantum regime using sometools of quantum information theory.

Quantifying entanglement (resource theory of entanglement).

Strengthenings of fundamental quantum entropy inequalities.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 113 / 113

Page 450: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Other topics

Capacities of Gaussian quantum channels. These model practicalcommunication channels. A number of open questions remain here.(see Shannon lecture of Holevo).

Covert communication over quantum channels. (Informal workshopon Wednesday afternoon).

Quantum channels with memory.

Security of quantum cryptography (bringing theoretical securityproofs closer to experimental implementations).

Reformulating thermodynamics in the quantum regime using sometools of quantum information theory.

Quantifying entanglement (resource theory of entanglement).

Strengthenings of fundamental quantum entropy inequalities.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 113 / 113

Page 451: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Other topics

Capacities of Gaussian quantum channels. These model practicalcommunication channels. A number of open questions remain here.(see Shannon lecture of Holevo).

Covert communication over quantum channels. (Informal workshopon Wednesday afternoon).

Quantum channels with memory.

Security of quantum cryptography (bringing theoretical securityproofs closer to experimental implementations).

Reformulating thermodynamics in the quantum regime using sometools of quantum information theory.

Quantifying entanglement (resource theory of entanglement).

Strengthenings of fundamental quantum entropy inequalities.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 113 / 113

Page 452: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Other topics

Capacities of Gaussian quantum channels. These model practicalcommunication channels. A number of open questions remain here.(see Shannon lecture of Holevo).

Covert communication over quantum channels. (Informal workshopon Wednesday afternoon).

Quantum channels with memory.

Security of quantum cryptography (bringing theoretical securityproofs closer to experimental implementations).

Reformulating thermodynamics in the quantum regime using sometools of quantum information theory.

Quantifying entanglement (resource theory of entanglement).

Strengthenings of fundamental quantum entropy inequalities.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 113 / 113

Page 453: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Other topics

Capacities of Gaussian quantum channels. These model practicalcommunication channels. A number of open questions remain here.(see Shannon lecture of Holevo).

Covert communication over quantum channels. (Informal workshopon Wednesday afternoon).

Quantum channels with memory.

Security of quantum cryptography (bringing theoretical securityproofs closer to experimental implementations).

Reformulating thermodynamics in the quantum regime using sometools of quantum information theory.

Quantifying entanglement (resource theory of entanglement).

Strengthenings of fundamental quantum entropy inequalities.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 113 / 113

Page 454: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Other topics

Capacities of Gaussian quantum channels. These model practicalcommunication channels. A number of open questions remain here.(see Shannon lecture of Holevo).

Covert communication over quantum channels. (Informal workshopon Wednesday afternoon).

Quantum channels with memory.

Security of quantum cryptography (bringing theoretical securityproofs closer to experimental implementations).

Reformulating thermodynamics in the quantum regime using sometools of quantum information theory.

Quantifying entanglement (resource theory of entanglement).

Strengthenings of fundamental quantum entropy inequalities.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 113 / 113

Page 455: Quantum Information Theory Tutorialmarkwilde.com/teaching/2016-isit/ISIT-QIT-tutorial-staggered.pdf · published by Cambridge University Press (2nd edition forthcoming) July 10, 2016,

Other topics

Capacities of Gaussian quantum channels. These model practicalcommunication channels. A number of open questions remain here.(see Shannon lecture of Holevo).

Covert communication over quantum channels. (Informal workshopon Wednesday afternoon).

Quantum channels with memory.

Security of quantum cryptography (bringing theoretical securityproofs closer to experimental implementations).

Reformulating thermodynamics in the quantum regime using sometools of quantum information theory.

Quantifying entanglement (resource theory of entanglement).

Strengthenings of fundamental quantum entropy inequalities.

Mark M. Wilde (LSU) 113 / 113


Recommended